Home

"user manual"

1. N E Input Type Adjustment Press the O Key less than 1 s Vv _5 cel Level Press the O Key less than 1 s 190 108 E JG Process Value E p g RUN STOP Ke E Added when Additional B 1 Scaling Lower Limit PEETUS EBS PV display is ON Bes RUNI NOR g Display cal 1 ce z Displayed only Temperature Input Shift S cal BL Adu once on p B Z5 Broces value Erp Aarm Value 1 LE FI Bees entering f Es g adjustment level i H 0 i 5 i E ca point aiic i3 x g For input type of analog kal cal 2 B Upper Limit Set either a Auto Manual Switch 3 ce BRE ar Executercancel SH Temperature ofthese a A n BAL IH Alarm Value E an A ontrol only B Upper Limit 1 p BBa SFF 0 0 Input Shift Value parameters fma a a E p Upper Limi df L 3a SI 2 point shit lt Press the I pla select addition is ON aaa 5 fi For input type of FML Ci icati 1G Lower Limit zm Key ss is sempera
2. 6 79 2 78 E5AN Be E E3 ce c ganon nooo 525 i Met Hee gt 22 f een P ae MMM ORE an ni siika A Amg ii M Ss oo ceogox opaga ARAN itt eee cts Gl eae y Se ce ee gogor ooo0g gt D ka i ies Ss pge fi COOO Gs ae E gr gage SS h CRBC Piae al gt 8888 E D e CEO T Kift apaia 2 acpi pRa i 7 J Beer N O a f 2000 ts 0 DOG Qe oore Sse A AARC E TEORIE poe an 79 2 E5EN r KAN 78 48 2 44 ommron e a ii i F ES 655 5 ii cil sug foe fe K It Sza WD it H i om A re 3 22 Installation Section 2 1 E5GN e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks 48 2 99 44 8 if BED D ci Co oy F 9 b o eeo ena amp NI NI 3 E D Coe ao l 3 EED Ss ey eE o e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks 48 j 2a 100 P 44 8 lo x i ite o On HA m N 23 Section 2 1 Installation 2 1 2 Panel Cutout Unit mm E5CN CN U Individual Mounting Group Mounting 48 x number of Units 2 5 1 45795 i 0 is E S E5AN Individual Mounting Group Mounting 922e 96 x number of
3. B 1 HB ON OFF PV Change 230 Control Output 2 E SPdP PV SP Display B hbi ONO 222 Color Assignment 239 E 4 Screen Selection 249 ke PV Stable Auxiliary Output 1 adSL MV Display Heater Burnout uxiliary Outpu BadSt play 5 Latch 223 Band 231 Assignment _a Selection 249 Alarm 1 ON ili 3 py PV Decimal Heater Burnout 232 Auxiliary Output 2 E PY dP e 250 Hysteresis 223 Delay Assignment 241 _an Point Display ER ST Stable Alarm 2 ON 232 Auxiliary Output 3 242 B Pr 5E PV Status 250 Range 224 Delay Assignment Bas i Display Function ER a Alarm 3 ON Character E 5754 SV Status 224 Delay 232 Select ee see Display Function 251 a Alarm 1 OFF i i g Di Refresh 0 AT Calcul Soak Time Unit 8 d REF Display Refresi g AE z AT Cale ated 225 Delay 232 243 Ee te Bae 251 ca Ea Control Output 1 at i Alarm 2 OFF Al SP 5 RAIM BAE HI AT Hysteresis arm E FA IM ON OFF 252 Ee 28 225 Delay 232 Selection 244 g tone cae ce nee i Control Output 2 F LEMA Limit Cycle MV fee 232 Manual MV Limit 244 E PACM ON OFF Count 252 ggg Amplitude 225 Enable 2 Monitor Je onito E NE Input Digital Poa Input Shift Type 2 PV Rate of E PRI Control Output 1 an Filter 226 33
4. level to the operation level PV SP Operating Procedure In this example A M Auto Manual is set for the PF Setting parameter ES5AN EN only Operation Level PV SP Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level 2 Press the kel Key to select PID ON OFF and then select PID with the A Key Initial Setting Level 3 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press Move to Ad ing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving vanced Function to the Advanced Function Setting Level r Setting Level 125 Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Parameter Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level 5 Select the Auto Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the ce Key Auto Manual Select Addition 6 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to ON 7 Press the cel Key to select the PF Sett
5. 69 Alarm Outputs 3 9 1 Set value Alarm Types Alarm type Alarm function OFF Alarm output operation When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative Output OFF Section 3 9 Description of function No alarm 0 1 See note 1 Upper and lower limit See note 2 Set the deviation in the set point by setting the alarm upper limit H and alarm lower limit L 2 Upper limit aX ie ON 7 SP Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X Lower limit ON X ie OFF SP Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm value X 4 See note 1 Upper and lower limit range See note 3 Set the deviation above the set point as the alarm upper limit H and the deviation below the set point as the alarm lower limit L The alarm output will be ON within the set deviations 5 See note 1 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence N gt L Hie See note 4 OFF mas See note 5 A standby sequence is added to the upper and lower limit alarm 1 See note 6 Upper limit with standby sequence gt X e ON OFF oF A standby sequence is added to the upper limit alarm 2 See note 6 Lower limit with standby sequence A standby s
6. 13 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Communications Functions Note External Power Supply for ES1B Note Transfer Output 14 Communications functions utilizing CompoWay F See note 1 SYSWAY See note 2 or Modbus See note 3 can be used RS 485 Interface Use the E53 CNLI03N2 for the E5CN or the E53 EN03 for the ESAN EN RS 232C Interface Use the E53 EN01 for the ESAN EN 1 CompoWay F is an integrated general purpose serial communications protocol developed by OMRON It uses commands compliant with the well established FINS together with a consistent frame format on OMRON Programmable Controllers to facilitate communications be tween personal computers and components 2 SYSWAY communications do not support alarm 3 3 Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric 4 The E5CN and E5CN U do not support the RS 232C interface The E5AN OPO N or E5EN CIPLI N with the E53 CNUIPLIN2 can be used as the power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensors The E5GN does not provide a power supply for an ES1B Infrared Tempera ture Sensor A transfer output for 4 to 20 mA can be used with the ESAN E5EN F For ESON COCO models models without F
7. 3s A M display flashes for at least 1 s M Cf Multi sp Il On m LI e If an event input is set to MANU auto manual the Auto Manual Switch parameter will not be displayed Use the event input to switch between automatic and manual modes 123 Performing Manual Control Using the PF Key to Move to the Manual Control Level Auto Manual Select Addition Note Operating Procedure Operation Level 3 itial Setting Level Input Type nitial Setting Level Move to Ad vanced Function Parameter Initialization Auto Manual Select Addition 124 Section 4 13 e When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M Auto Manual pressing the PF Key for at least one second while in the adjustment or operation level will change the mode to manual mode and move to the manual control level During manual operation it is not possible to move to any displays other than PV MV Manual MV Press the PF Key for at least one second from the PV MV display in the manual control mod
8. 4 Press the cel Key to select FE 5 Press the A Key to select aN oF F is the default nitial Setting Level 6 To return to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least one sec ond Input Type 67 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 Operation Level 7 To return to the operation level press the LO Key for at least one second 3 8 4 Manual Setup Individual PID constants can be manually set in the Proportional Band Inte gral Time and Derivative Time parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure In this example the Proportional Band parameter is set to 10 0 the Integral Time parameter to 250 and the Derivative Time parameter to 45 Adjustment Level 1 Press the lO Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display 2 Press the ce Key to select the proportional band parameter Proportional Band 3 Use the A and Keys to set 10 0 4
9. at MMMM 2 MANN Aa AA DA DA JAN IAN IAN A S Bo 9998 OMRON E5GN E5AN User s Manual Basic Type E5CN E5AN E5EN E5GN Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual Basic Type Revised June 2015 Preface The E5CN E5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN are Digital Temperature Controllers The E5CN and E5CN U are both compact temperature controllers with the E5CN featuring screw terminal connec tions and the E5CN U featuring socket pin connections The E5GN can be connected using screw ter minals or screwless clamp terminals The main functions and characteristics of these Digital Temperature Controllers are as follows e Any of the following types of input can be used thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer infrared sensor analog voltage or analog cur rent Either standard or heating cooling control can be performed Both auto tuning and self tuning are supported Event inputs can be used to switch set points multi SP function switch between RUN and STOP status switch between automatic and manual operation start reset the simple program function and perform other operations Event inputs are not applicable to the ESCN U Heater burnout detection heater short HS alarms
10. 266 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Section 6 6 6 6 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 6 6 1 Calibrating a Current Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input with a current input set as the input type 1 2 3 1 2 Connect the power supply Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals as shown in the following diagram E5CN E5AN EN Input power supply Input power supply E5CN U E5GN Input power supply Input power supply Turn the power ON Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV to 20 mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered Whe
11. Section 3 9 Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF en H lt 0 L lt 0 L HSP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 oe ee H lt 0 L gt 0 IH lt IL H gt L H LSP IH 2 LI H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IHI lt IL 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence For the lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps e In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps 6 Refer to 4 2 1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 8 Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72 e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm e Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page When the upper and lower limits are set independently H is displayed for upper limit values and L is displayed for lower limit values e To set the alarm value upper and lower limits for deviation set the upper and lower limits in each of the Alarm 1 to 3 Upper Limit and Alarm 1 to 3 Lower Limit parameters in the operation level This procedure sets alarm 1 as an upper limit alarm The related parameters and se
12. 52 Setting the Input Type List of Input Types Controllers with Ther mocouple Resistance Thermome ter Multi input Models with analog input Input type Platinum resistance thermometer Specifications Set value Section 3 2 Input temperature setting range 200 to 850 C 300 to 1 500 F 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F JPt100 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F Thermocouple K 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F 20 0 to 500 0 C 0 0 to 900 0 F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F CO N O01 BR WO N oO 20 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 750 0 F o 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F oO 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F e 200 to 600 C 300 to 1 100 F N 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F ere wo 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F _ A 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F ol 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F O 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F N 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F B En o 100 to 1 800 C 300 to 3 200 F Infrared temperature sensor ES1B 10 to 70 C O 0 to 90 C 0 to 190 F 60 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F 11
13. 4 4 Executing Heating Cooling Control 4 4 1 Heating Cooling Control Heating cooling control can be used on the E5CN OM0O 500 with an E53 CNQUON2 E5CN O2M0 500 E5AN O30M0O 500 N or E5EN O30M0O 500 N Heating cooling control operates when H Zf heating cooling is selected for the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter 95 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 The following functions are assigned to outputs in the initial status Parameter name Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment Control output for heating Control Output 2 Assignment Not assigned Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Alarm 3 E5AN EN only Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when the control mode is changed Example E5CN Parameter name Without control output 2 Standard Heating cooling Control output Control output heating heating With control output 2 Standard Heating cooling Control output Control output heating heating Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Not assigned See note 1 Not assigned See note 1 Not assigned Control output coo ing Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Alarm 1 See note 2 Alarm 1 See note Alarm 1 See note Al
14. Controller readout A A After shifting Controller readout after shifting e g 120 C Controller readout before F shifting e g 110 C Input shift value e g 10 C Before shifting Control target temperature B 0 Near set point e g 120 C Figure 2 Illustration of 1 Point Shift 91 Shifting Input Values Section 4 1 Method for a 2 point Use a 2 point input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout Shift values across the range of the Sensor 1 2 3 1 Shift the Controller readout at two points near room temperature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled For this reason check the thermometer temperature B and Controller readout A with the thermometer temperature near room temperature and near the set point e Y1 is the Controller readout at room temperature before shifting and X1 is the Controller readout at room temperature after shifting e Y2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature before shifting and X2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature after shifting e Set the upper limit temperature input shift and the lower limit temper ature input shift using the following formulas based on the tempera tures before shifting Y1 and Y2 the temperatures after shifting X1 and X2 the set temperature upper limit YH and the set temperature lower limit YL The shift
15. St 25 fy EF 25 ma ee o a Ses Sag Seo SPO PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP MV Display for Select either the manipulated variable heating or manipulated variable cool Heating and Cooling ing as the MV to be displayed for PV SP MV during heating and cooling con Control trol The MV Display Selection parameter is displayed only when heating cooling control is being performed and PV SP MV is selected in the PV SP Display Screen parameter or a Monitor Setting Item Display parameter Parameter name Setvalue Symbol _ Display contents MV Display Selection Manipulated variable heating Manipulated variable cooling 84 Setting the No 3 Display Operating Procedure Operation Level Cer IC PV SP o L I min Leu CoOCO0n Oooocd Initial Setting Level wyt_ Input Type oO LNMC Co 5 Cocoon T e Fem Initial Setting Level 2 cmt Move to Mito Advanced 159 Function Setting Snb Level AGE On OOC ZMT LIWLE BFF Parameter Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level PV SP Display Screen Selection Initial Setting Level 0000 On GOC NIL Liv unt Input Type Operation Leve om 5 0000 On ooo m a Lair m LI m U un fy C3 PV SP Operation Leve PV SP Section 3 11 This procedure displays PV SP MV and PV SP
16. Operation Level Input Type Initial Setting Level Move to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization PV Status Display Function PV Status Display Function nitial Setting Level Input Type Section 4 22 This procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1 1 3 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key y Use the advanced function setting level by either pressing the two seconds without pressing any key Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to the ce Key or waiting Press the ce Key to select the PV Status Display Function parameter A Press the lA Key to select ALM1 O Press the LO Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev el Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the operation level If the Alarm 1 status is ON PV and ALM1 will be alternately displayed 4 22 Logic Operations 4 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo e The logic operation function logically calculates as 1 or O the Controller status alarms SP ramp RUN STOP auto manual etc and the external
17. E5CN Controllers Long lif Contre E at d N The E5O0N OOOTO is set for a K thermocouple 250 VAC 3 A resistive load input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is Rela output used an input error 5 EF will occur Check the 250 VAC 3 A resistive load setting of the input type parameter Voltage output for driving SSR 12 VDC 21 mA Current output Auxiliary outputs relay outputs 0 to 20 mA DC 250 VAC 3A 4 to 20 mA DC resistive load Load 600 Q max Auxiliary outputs relay outputs T T Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Control output 2 sS e Voltage output for driving SSR DONOTy DONOT Auxiliary output 1 12 VDC 21 mA mA USE 4 USE L gt gt I gt input power A heater burnout alarm heater short alarm DO NOT v l lt supply heater overcurrent alarm or input error is UE PFI F sent to the output to which the alarm 1 os TC P 100 to 240 VAC function is assigned Analog input Ula 24 VACIVDC larit universal input no polarity Option Units E53 CNHHO3N2 E53 CNHBN2 E53 CNQ03N2 E53 CNPBN2 E53 CNPHN2 E53 CNPO3N2 Communications Event inputs Communications Event Inputs and External Power Communications RS 485 RS 485 and CT2 and CT RS 485 and External Power Supply Supply and CT and External Power Supply Control Output 2 RS 485
18. Ferrite Core Connection Examples 1 ESCN E5CN H Auxiliary outputs as relay outputs Control output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary DONOT DONOT A output 1 aoe aoe Y Power supply L gt v i lt Input power Donor gt L gt BI G eben USE To Ne I Analog input l TC Pt universal input 2 E5AN E5EN E5AN H E5EN H Event Inputs Power 16 Connected to supply pees I communications or 122 EV1 3 turns event inputs 1 and 2 D Control atti Power Connected to 1 Cri cT2 Output2 Supply control output 1 SUNE Control output 1 i Control External power supply Connected to 7 Output 2 12 VDC 20 mA control output 2 r s 3 turns or external Analary output 3 DONOT DONOT power supply l USE USE D lAuxiliary output 2 A 1 i 6 DONOT l USE mA B 1 7 efa A Auxiliary output 1 B v DO NOT E ie USE TC Pt universal input Analog input I Communications 1 I RS 232C RS 485 l 1 sD O B i m aw f Connected to event I sa pDONOT USE inputs 3 and 4 3 turns D DONOT USE 1 B l 1 DO NOT USE 2 A l ee ee ee J DO NOT USE Connected to 4 to 20 mA DC transfer output 3 turns Transfer output T Load 600 max DO NOT USE xvi Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual
19. PF Setting PF Setting Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 1 nitial Setting Level cn Operation Level Monitor Setting Item Display 1 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the ce Key or wait ing two seconds without pressing any key 4 Press the ke 5 Press the lA 6 Press the ce 7 Press the A 8 Press the lO Key to select the PF Setting parameter Key to select PFDP Monitor Setting Item Key to select the Monitor Setting Item 1 parameter Key to select 7 Alarm Value 1 Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level 9 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 10 Press the PF Key to display Alarm Value 1 4 20 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations 4 20 1 Control Output ON OFF Count Function
20. gt Pou lt j Y92F 34 aa alios ste if gas AA SA S I e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 12 None gt PORC lt xxii E Wire Connections Previous models Upgraded models e Wire connection direction Perpendicular to e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks back surface Wire connection direction Horizontal from the top and bottom of back surface e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wire connection direction Perpendicular to back surface xxiii E Wiring Terminals Previous models e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Terminals Wire gauge Ferrules AWG24 to AWG14 Terminals 1 to 6 2 1 mmdia max AWG28 to AWG22 Terminals 7 to 9 1 3 mm dia max 5to6mm Wires Ferrul q 5 to 6 mm es Terminals Screws Tightening torque Terminals 1to6 M2 6 0 23 to 0 25 N m Terminals 7 to 9 M2 0 12 to 0 14 N m E Removing the Terminal Block Previous models Xxiv Press firmly in on both sides of the terminal block to release the lock and then pull up on the terminal Upgraded models e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Changed from ferrules to crimp terminals for M3 screws
21. G Heater Current 2 Value MV at Stop Monitor fo 0000 Oo 00 0000 or o0 G Heater Burnout Detection 2 20 OU 00 ne Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 Integral Time i SP Ramp Set Value 00 O00 o0 o Leakage Current 1 Monitor Derivative Time MV Upper Limit 20 0000 HS Alarm 1 Cooling Coefficient MV Lower Limit 00 0000 Leakage Current 2 MV Change Rate Limit Monitor HS Alarm 2 Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 178 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 L Adu Adjustment Level Display This parameter is displayed after moving to the adjustment level iT When a logic operation is set a period will be displayed on the No 2 dis play e This parameter indicates that the adjustment level has been entered The Adjustment Level parameter will not be displayed again even if the ce Key is pressed in the adjustment level to scroll through the parame ters Function The ramp must be in operation and 2 PID control must be used Event Ak AT Execute Cancel Input Assignments 1 and 2 parame ters must be other than 100 or 40 AT Execute Cancel This parameter executes auto tuning
22. re ie t il Platinum resistan i i Thermocouple atinum resistance Platinum resistance thermometer Analog input Thermocouple thermometer Analog input E5CN E5CN U Do not Do not use use Do not Donot lt 4 8 Oe m a e M a oO Q 9 V ane dp D 4 Do not Do not D D 20 use P F Y 4D use Plati ist Plati ist A Thermocouple rore ance Analog input Thermocouple eer ance Analog input E5AN EN E5GN When extending the thermocouple lead wires be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple type When extending the lead wires of a platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resis tance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same 36 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Control Output 1 e Outputs are sent from terminals 1 and 2 with the E5CN from pins 4 to 6 with the E5CN U and from pins 3 and 4 with the ESAN EN GN The fol lowing diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5CN V GND 9 Relay Voltage for driving SSR E5CN U ss om Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5AN EN om Relay Voltage for driving SSR Current E5GN e The following table shows the specifications for each output type E5CN CN U Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive l
23. ce Key or leave the setting for at least two seconds to move to the ad vanced function setting level from the initial setting level 9 To return to the initial setting level press the ond O Key for at least one sec 10 To return to the operation level press the LO Key for at least one second 109 Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level 4 9 1 Protection e To move to the protect level press the O and cel Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in operation level or adjustment level See note Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter advanced function setting level e The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during Con troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being mod ified unintentionally There are four types of protection operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect setting change protect and PF Key pro tect e The protect level settings restrict the range of parameters that can be used Operation Adjustment Protect The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range of protection Set value Can be dis played Can be dis played and changed Can be dis Can be dis played Can be dis played and changed C
24. 1 lt gt B BY RS 485 2 lt A RS 485 lt gt A 3 Do not use ENO L03 E5AN EN LILILI03 RS 485 ESGN LIILIOS SOSCS 0003 Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes that is connect terminators to both ends The minimum terminal resistance is 54 Q 42 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Communications Unit Connection Diagram ESCN Host computer RS 485 Shield oo E5CN No 1 E5CN No 31 FG i RS 485 7 RS 485 3 k No abbreviation i Abbreviation h aol AQ A lt B 1 Mark 11 B i B i A gt B 0 Space eerie Eain i ETEA J Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W E5AN EN Host computer RS 485 Shield E5AN EN No 31 RS 485 Abbreviation A lt B 1 Mark A gt B 0 Space Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W E5GN Host computer RS 485 E5GN No 1 E5GN No 31 RS 485 8 ao A lt B 1 Mark 2 A gt B 0 Space Terminator 120 Q 1 2 W e The RS 485 connection can be either one to one or one to N A maxi mum of 32 Units including the host computer can be connected in one to N systems The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use a shielded
25. 117 Loop Burnout Alarm Operation Level Section 4 12 9 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 4 12 Loop Burnout Alarm 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 118 Set point e With a loop burnout alarm there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation SP PV is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Detection Band parameter within the LBA detection time Loop burnout alarms are detected at the following times LBA level LBA level LBA band mara Area where LBA LBA detection LBA detection OMe is not detected time ime detection time gt 4 P4 gt 4 Pid gt 2 amp 3 4 5 A 6 7 4 LBA OFF LBA ON LBA OFF LBA ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF The process value is within the LBA level between 3 and 4 and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF If the process value is outside the LBA level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LB
26. Setting the Set Point Lower limit Value Operating Procedure Set Point Lower Limit Set Point Lower Limit 100 1 Select the Set Point Lower Limit parameter in the initial setting level 2 Use the Al and Keys to set the parameter to 100 4 7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 4 7 1 SP Ramp 106 The SP ramp function is used to restrict the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change an area where the set point is restricted will be created as shown in the following diagram During the SP ramp control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function SP le SP ramp SP after change Sf SP before change LY i Time SP ramp set value SP ramp time unit s min Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp is specified using the SP Ramp Set Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters The SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to OFF by default i e the SP ramp function is disabled Changes in the ramp set point can be monitored in the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter operation level Use this parameter when mo
27. Temperature unit Set point upper limit Set point lower limit initial setting level Page 202 201 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 LN H Scaling Upper Limit The input type must be set for an TML P analog input LN L Scaling Lower limit dP Decimal Point e These parameters can be used when the input type is set for an analog input e When an analog input is used scaling is performed Set the upper limit in the Scaling Upper Limit parameter and the lower limit in the Scaling Lower Limit parameter The Decimal Point parameter specifies the decimal point position of parameters set point etc whose unit is EU i Function e Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit A Setting range Default Settin Scaling Upper Limit Scaling lower limit 1 to 9999 S Scaling Lower Limit 1999 to scaling upper limit 1 e Decimal Point Parameter Setting Default name range Decimal Point Controllers with Thermocouple Resis tance Thermometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs Set value Settings Example 0 digits past decimal point 1 digits past decimal point 2 digits past decimal point 3 digits past decimal point E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 H The input type must be set for a tem d u Temperature Unit perature input e Set the temperature input unit to either C or F Function Setting range Default
28. 6 2 User Calibration The E5CN CN U AN EN GN is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory and normally need not be calibrated by the user If however it must be calibrated by the user use the parameters for calibrat ing temperature input and analog input OMRON however cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user Also calibration data is overwritten with the latest calibration results The default calibration settings cannot be restored after user calibration Perform user calibration with care 6 2 1 Calibrating Inputs The input type selected in the parameter is used for calibration The input types are as follows Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs e Thermocouple 16 types e Infrared temperature sensor 4 types e Analog input 1 type e Platinum resistance thermometer 5 types Controllers with Analog Inputs e Current input 2 types e Voltage input 3 types 6 2 2 Registering Calibration Data The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered It can be offi cially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values Therefore be sure to temporarily register all items when you perform the calibration When the data is registered it is also recorded that user calibration has been performed Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equ
29. Alarm Latch OFF m ii jaa ON delay set time Alarm will not turn ON e The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time Also the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time e If an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON Also if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF Parameters Related to Alarm Delays Parameter name Set monitor values Alarm 1 ON Delay A laN 0 to 999 s Alarm 2 ON Delay AcoN 0 to 999 s Alarm 3 ON Delay AJON 0 to 999 s Alarm 1 OFF Delay A iaf 0 to 999 s Alarm 2 OFF Delay Aaf 0 to 999 s Alarm 3 OFF Delay Aldor 0 to 999 s 116 Alarm Delays Note Operating Procedure Operation Level nitial Setting Level Input Type nitial Se
30. 110 Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 The default is OFF e The all protect indication Or will light when setting change protect is set PF Key Protect This protect level enables or disables PF Key operations Setvalue Ci escription O OFF PF Key enabled ON PF Key disabled Operation as function key prohibited The default is OFF 4 9 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level e Protect level can be moved to only by display the password display and entering the correct password The user can set any password in the Protect Level Password parameter If no password is set i e if the pass word is set to 0 in the Protect Level Password parameter the password input display to move to protect level will not be displayed and the protect level can be moved to directly Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to move to protect level E Example with a Password of 1234 Operation Level PV SP 1 Press the O and cel Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Move to Protect Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level Level to the protect level 2 Press the Al Key to set t
31. k al communications 4 4 ponor r i M ee opt p AC TC CT input CT poner SeSeesa ssa sass Analog input Communications x h A B supply a PT y Universal TC Pt input 100 to 240 VAC or 12VDC 21 mA B B Event input Z Ev EV2 ponor 24 VACIDC no polarity t4 yt O or input error alarm 1 output 1 ALM1 OUT1 ae Finput powerf Control L Auxiiary output 2 supply output 1 output 1 e 100 to 240 VAC e 24 VAC DC no polarity U Rel tput Al tput 1 nayong semanas f XX E Body Drawout Previous models Upgraded models e Using Screws E5AN EN j J EEEE O E ii O K E Dimensions Previous models Bezel thickness 3 mm Depth 100 mm Using Hooks Upgraded models e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness 2 mm Depth 99 mm Shape of slits changed e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Bezel thickness 2 mm Shape of slits changed Ss A xxi E Terminal Block Configuration Previous models Upgraded models Models with Screw Terminal Blocks e Models with Screw Terminal Blocks Terminals 1 to 6 M2 6 screw terminals Terminals 1 to 12 M3 screw terminals Terminals 7 to 9 M2 screw terminals
32. 1 Displaying the Library Import Dialog Box Control Output Assignment Control Output 1 Control output heating bd Control Output 2 No assignment be Auxiliary Output Assignment Logic operation samples for specific cases are set in the library in advance Examples of settings for specific cases are loaded by selecting them from the library list and clicking the OK Button 148 Logic Operations Section 4 22 Example Selecting Library 1 lo x Library List z Libray2 Library Keeping an alarm output off while operation is stopped Library Library5 Library6 m Function overview While operation is stopped an auxiliary output does not output an alarm m Operation illustration Ma RUNISTOP amt ZZ Work bit 1 i TZ Auxiliary output 1 i m12 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation is running auxiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 m Configuration content Work bit operation n Alam 1 RUN STOP Work bit 1 i 2 tt LA m A Le Anvilianz 4 Cancel 2 Switching Work Bit Operations Select the work bit logic operations from the Operation of Work Bit 1 to Op eration of Work Bit 8 Tab Pages 3 Selecting the Operation Type From one to four operations are supported If work bits are not to be used set them to No operation Always OFF the default No operation Always OFF Operation of Work Bit Operation of Work Bit2 Op
33. 20 to 1 720 C 40 to 3 040 F S 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F 20 to 1 720 C 40 to 3 040 F B 100 to 1 800 C 300 to 3 200 F 0 to 1 820 C 0 to 3 240 F ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensor 10 to 70 C 0 to 90 C 0 to 190 F 20 to 130 C 40 to 270 F 60 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F 20 to 160 C 40 to 320 F 115 to 165 C 0 to 165 C 0 to 320 F 20 to 205 C 40 to 400 F 140 to 260 C 0 to 260 C 0 to 500 F 20 to 300 C 40 to 580 F Analog input 0 to 50 mV Any of the following ranges by scaling 1 999 to 9 999 199 9 to 999 9 5 to 105 of setting range The display shows 1999 to 9999 numeric range with decimal point omitted Thermocouple 0 to 2300 C 0 to 3200 F 20 to 2320 C 40 to 3240 F 0 to 1300 C 0 to 2300 F 20 to 1320 C 40 to 2340 F 303 Input type Current input Control lers with Analog Specifications 4 to 20 mA Set value 0 to 20 mA Input setting range Any of the following ranges by scaling 1 999 to 9 999 Inputs Voltage input 1to5V Oto5V 0to10V 199 9 to 999 9 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 Appendix Input indication range 5 to 105 of setting range The display shows 199
34. Function e ees U Dea A Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 FS Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA detection time Page 236 LBA band Page 237 advanced function set ting level Alarm 1 must be assigned The alarm type must be set to 12 LbAb LBA Band LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA band l e If a control deviation greater than the LBA band is not reduced when the LBA level is exceeded an loop burnout is detected Function M R A Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 0 0 to 999 9 C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 00 to 99 99 FS Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA detection time LBA level advanced function setting level Page 236 237 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Function m Setting See 238 The transfer output type must be set Control Output 1 Assignment to OFF when the control output is a
35. Note current output e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 1 Setting range Default No function is assigned to control output 1 Heating control output is output Cooling control output is output See note 1 Alarm 1 is output See note 2 Alarm 2 is output See note 2 Alarm 3 is output See note 2 Program end is output See notes 2 and 3 Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 2 Work bit 1 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 2 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 3 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 4 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 5 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 6 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 7 See notes 2 and 4 Work bit 8 See notes 2 and 4 1 If a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 is output 2 Can be selected for relay and voltage outputs for driving SSR only 3 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 Transfer output type Page 210 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 alte Control Output 2 Assignment Control output 2 must be assigned m e Thi
36. This manual describes the ES5CN CN U AN EN Digital Temperature Controllers and includes the sec tions described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an ESCN CN U AN EN Digital Temperature Controller Overview Section 1 introduces the features components and main specifications of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers e Setup Section 2 describes the work required to prepare the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers for operation including installation and wiring e Basic Operations Section 3 describes the basic operation of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Control lers including key operations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation e Operations for Applications Section 4 describes scaling the SP ramp function and other special functions that can be used to make the most of the functionality of the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Controllers Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation e User Calibration Section 6 describes how the user can calibrate the E5CN CN U AN EN GN Digital Temperature Con trollers e Appendix The Appendix provides information for easy reference including lis
37. e Turning ON an event input The program start must be assigned to an event input See note e Starting with an Operation Command using communications When the program start is not assigned to an event input When the simple program is started and reset writing is performed to EEPROM Be sure to consider the write life 1 million writes of the EEPROM in the system design When the program start is assigned to an event input the Program Start parameter will function as a monitor display and the RSET STRT displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset the simple program When this is done the Program Start parameter func tions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key operations If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF the event input assignment setting will be initialized to None Soak Time and Wait Band Note Wait band Set point aoe ag alae eee Wait band A i 1 H RSET gt STRT OOE Soak time remain Set point Set point The wait band is the band within which the process value is stable in respect to the set point The soak time is measured within the wait band The timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is within the wait band around the set point i e SP wait band In the following dia gram the timer will be stopped between the start and 1 2 and 3 and 4 and 5 and will measure
38. gt Operation Type No operation Alm Work Bit 1 is used by Work Bit1 Always OFF Number of Multi SP Uses Control Quiput Assignment 1 25P Control Qutput1 Control output heating Le Le Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Dutput 2 No assignment Event Input z vent Input 1 Event input 1 extemal ing z None Auvilary Output Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Ld Le Event Input 2 Event input 2 extemal ing z RUN STOP Event Input 3 vent input 3 extemal ing Z None Audia Dutput2 Alam 2 Le Li L Auxiliary Output 3 Alarm 3 Event Input 4 Event input 4 extemal ing z None sax 93 Select Library 7 from the library list and then click the OK Button 1 Keeping an alarm output off while operation is stopped l 7 f A Lend Confirm the following settings and then click the OK way m Function overview While operation is stopped an auxiliary output does not output an alarm B utto n m Operation illustration wore ZA Work bit 1 operation type Operation 1 YY emt Work bit 1 input assignment A 7 Alarm 1 Workbit1 i a kram Work bit 1 input assignment B 19 Invert for RUN STOP Work bit 1 input assignment C 0 Always OFF Toeren Work bit 1 input assignment D 0 Always OFF wose 1 While operation is stopped auxiliary output 1 does not output alarm 1 2 While operation is
39. in the model number the cur rent output can be used as a simple transfer output Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1 3 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Parameters are divided into groups each called a level Each of the set val ues setting items in these levels is called a parameter The parameters on the ESCN CN U AN EN GN are divided into the following 9 levels When the power is turned ON all of the display lights for approximately one second Power ON Start in manual mode Start in automatic mode Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s See note 4 7 Press the Operation Adjustment O Eel Level Level Press the Keys for at Ol kel least 1 s Press the Keys for at O Key less than 1 s least3s BS y Display a P5 will flash Goo iin Muu after 1st Eee PF Key Press the O Key i f See note 5 second Manual for at least 3 s while PF Key Monitor Setting R M is displayed See note 5 Item Level mode A will flash after 1st second Manual Control Level See note 4 Press the PF Key for atleast1s Press the O Key for at least 3 s Display will flash See IE __ after 1st second S ame Se note 1 eee Aga Protect Level Note The time taken to m
40. NaNE No function is assigned to auxiliary output 1 LMI a Heating control output is output See note L a Cooling control output is output See note 1 See note ALM i Alarm 1 is output i ALM Alarm 2 is output ALMI Alarm 3 is output I F ENd Program end is output See note 2 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm wR i Work bit 1 See note 4 Re Work bit 2 See note 4 WRI Work bit 3 See note 4 RY Work bit 4 See note 4 WS Work bit 5 See note 4 WRG Work bit 6 See note 4 NRT Work bit 7 See note 4 WA Work bit 8 See note 4 1 If E is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If a setting is changed when the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF control automatically switches to P ENd 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used 5 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control this parameter will automatically be set to s E Related Parameters Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Sube Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary output 2 must be assigned m e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliar
41. Troubleshooting Checking Problems If the Temperature Controller is not operating normally check the following points before requesting repairs If the problem persists contact your OMRON representative for details on returning the product Timing Turning ON the power for the first time Status Temperature unit C F is flashing Meaning ST self tuning is in progress default setting ON Countermeasures This is not a product fault The temperature unit C F flashes while ST self tuning is being performed Temperature error is large Input error S Err dis play Input type mismatch Check the sensor type and reset the input type correctly 52 Thermometer is not installed properly Check the thermometer installation location and polarity and install correctly 31 Communications are not possible Non recommended adapter is being used Make sure that the connected device is not faulty Section 1 of Communi cations Manual Communications are not possible Non recommended adapter is being used Make sure that the connected device is not faulty See note During opera tion Overshooting Undershooting Hunting ON OFF control is enabled default ON OFF control selected Select PID control and execute either ST self tuning or AT auto tuning When using self tuning turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Controller and load
42. a Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 202 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 mw p x m Function m Setting See SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit e These parameters set the upper and lower limits of the set points A set point can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters If these parameters are reset any set point that is outside of the new range will be forcibly changed to either the upper limit or the lower limit e When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Parameter Setting range Default name Set Point Temperature SP lower limit 1 to Input set Upper Limit ting range upper limit Analog SP lower limit 1 to scaling upper limit Set Point Temperature Input setting range lower limit Lower Limit to SP upper limit 1 Analog Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit 1 Controllers with Analog Inputs Setting range Umt Set Point Upp
43. abled Second Alarm 3 OFF Delay Agar 0 to 999 0 OFF delay dis abled Second Input Shift Type INS1 Temperature input 1 point shift INS2 Temperature input 2 point shift None MV at Stop and Error Addition MV SE OFF ON OFF aN None Auto Manual Select Addition ANAd OFF ON OFF aN None RT RE OFF ON aFF aN None HS Alarm Use HSL OFF ON aFF aN None HS Alarm Latch HSL OFF ON OFF aN None HS Alarm Hysteresis HSH 0 1 to 50 0 A LBA Detection Time LbA 0 to 9999 0 LBA function dis abled Second LBA Level Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 FS 295 Appendix Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Set value LBA Band Universal input 0 0 to 999 9 j C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 00 to 99 99 FS Control Output 1 When control output 1 is a None Assignment voltage output for driving SSR See note 2 NONE No assignment O Control output heat ing C O Control output cool ing ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 P END Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 WR1 Work bit 1 See note 5 WR2 Work bit 2 See note 5 WR3 Work bit 3 See note 5 WR4 Work bit 4 See note 5 WRS5 Work bit
44. ot Work Bi A Operaton of Work BLS Operation of Woic ELA gt Wok Bit isusedby Wok B 1 Always OFF Nurber ot MutiSP Uses 125P 7 Control Dutput1 Eveni Irout Date Event Input Assionment Control Output 2 Eveniirpu TEverc rou 1 None 7 Ausia Output Assignment Even rout RUN STOF 7 aam r Eveni Input one amz 7 Event input tone z C eg 3 Import of Lia Chose Operation of Werk Bit1 Operation of Werk Bit2 Operatan of Work Bit 3 Operation of Werk Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit Dperaton of Werk Bile gt Qoeraien Tye Opin Work BE is used by ON OFF Delay wf I Work ae 1 FL oun NOO oF CoR of Tine Unt Con Co Munte of Nu SP Uses Cont T fee o a Ceol Conte 7 Event InpulAesignnont ConrolOupe 2 Nosse E E F ian Output Assanmert 4 runstor Axia Dupa fata z ow T Aslay Bue lam E Aian Out alam 3 z l 2 Work bit 1 O Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo tree and click the Start Button The Logic Operation Editor will be displayed Confirm that the screen for work bit 1 is displayed and select Operation 3 from the Operation Type Field Set the operation by selecting one of the following Work bit 1 input assignment A 4 Event input 2 ex ternal input Work bit 1 input assignment B 0 Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment C 0 Always OFF
45. 3 10 7 Settings Heater Overcurrent Alarm To activate heater overcurrent alarm set the Heater Overcurrent Use parame ter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Overcur rent Detection 1 and Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter to 20 0 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The default setting for the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter is ON so set the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the LO Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level nitial Setting Level 2 Press the Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Input Type parameter For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level nitial Setting Level 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level 82 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting l
46. AWG24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG 18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the ESGN i Cross sectional area of conductor AWG24 0 205 mm AWG14 2 081 mm 43 Wiring Terminals External Power Supply for ES1B 44 Section 2 2 RS 232C E5AN EN GN Only When communications are to be used with the E5AN E5EN E5GN 000010 connect communications cable across terminals 11 to 13 or i 7 to 9 SD SD RS 232C RS 232C SG SG E5AN EN OO0010 E5GN O0O0010 Host computer A 25 pj E5AN EN Host computer DOS V E5AN EN RS 232C 25 pin ESAN N RS 232C 9 pin ESAN EN RS 232C RS 232C D TXD RD RXD 2 D RXD SD TXD 3 RS RTS ER DTR 4 CS CTS SG 5 DR DSR DR DSR 6 SG RS RTS 7 ER DTR Cs CTS 8 FG Host computer Host computer DOS V E5GN RS 232C 25 pin RS 232C 9 pin Rs 2320 D TXD RD RXD 2 D RXD SD TXD 3 RS RTS ER DTR 4 CS CTS SG 5 DR DSR DR DSR 6 SG RS RTS 7 ER DTR CS CTS 8 e A 1 1 connection is used The maximum cable length is 15 m To extend the transmission path use the OMRON Z3R RS 232C Optical Interface e Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm
47. Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value 3 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 1999 to 9999 EU MV Monitor Heat ing 5 0 to 105 5 standard 0 0 to 105 0 heating cooling MV Monitor Cool ing 288 0 0 to 105 0 Adjustment Level Parameters Adjustment Level Display Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Appendix Set value AT Execute Cancel OFF AT Cancel AT 2 100 AT Execute AT 1 40 AT Execute Communications Writing OFF ON Heater Current 1 Value Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 Heater Burnout Detection 1 0 0 to 50 0 Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 0 0 to 50 0 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 Heater Burnout Detection 2 0 0 to 50 0 Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 0 0 to 50 0 Leakage Current 1 Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 HS Alarm 1 0 0 to 50 0 Leakage Current 2 Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 HS Alarm 2 0 0 to 50 0 SP 0 SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP 1 SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU SP 2 SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU SP 3 SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Temperature Input Shift 199 9 to 999 9 C or F Upper Limit Temper a
48. Function Key 0 00 2 e eee eee Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations 0 0 4 20 1 Control Output ON OFF Count Function Displaying PV SV Status 4 21 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions 0 Logic Operations 4 22 1 The Logic Operation Function CX Thermo 4 22 2 Using Logic Operations 129 129 132 135 136 136 136 137 137 139 141 141 143 143 145 145 147 147 148 4 1 Shifting Input Values 4 1 1 Shifting Inputs The input shift matched to the sensor currently selected in the Input Type parameter is displayed e A 2 point shift is applied for infrared temperature sensors A 2 point shift can also be used if the Input Shift Type parameter advanced function set ting level is set to INS2 for a thermocouple or platinum resistance ther mometer There is no shift for analog inputs Use scaling for fine adjustments One point shift With a 1 point shift the value set for the Temperature Input Shift parame Temperature i Sans Input Shift ter adjustment level is applied to each point in the entire temperature input range For example if the input shift value is set to 1 2 C the pro cess value is treated as 201 2 C after the input shift is applied when the measured process value is 200 C Temperature A Upperliimit 2 4e See After shifting shifting 1 i 1 Bef
49. Function Key PF Setting e Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation set Set value in the PF Setting parameter E5AN EN only OFF Seiting Disabled Function Does not operate as a function key LINI LIM RUN Specifies RUN status Sta P STOP Specifies STOP status R 5 RUN STOP reverse operation Specifies reversing the RUN STOP operation status AE g 100 AT Execute Cancel Specifies reversing the 100 AT Exe cute Cancel status See note 1 40 AT Execute Cancel Specifies reversing the 40 AT Exe cute Cancel status See note 1 Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling all alarm latches See note 2 Auto Manual Specifies reversing the Auto Manual status See note 3 Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item dis play Select the monitor setting item according to the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level Note 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 2 Alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 4 13 Per forming Manual Control 4 Pressing the PF Key for at least one second exe
50. HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 223 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 ST must be ON and temperature S b ST Stable Range input standard control 2 PID control must be set e The setting of this parameter determines when ST operates l This parameter cannot be used when ST is set to OFF Function Setting range Unit Defaut A 0 1 to 999 9 15 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting BEE level ST must be OFF and 2 PID control ALFR o must be set e Normally use the default for this parameter l e This parameter sets the 2 PID control constant Function Setting range Unit Defaut A 0 00 t0 1 00 Setting E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 AE G AT Calculated Gain Control must be set to 2 PID control AE H AT Hysteresis LEMA i Function Setting See Limit Cycle MV Amplitude e Normally use the default values for these parameters e The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are calculated using AT When emphasizing response decrease the set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value e The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis for limit cycle operation during autotuning when switching ON and OFF e The Limit
51. Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Program Pattern parameter by pressing the kel Key Program Pattern 3 Use the Al Key to set the parameter to STOP 4 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting PV SP level to the operation level Adjustment Level 5 Press the lO Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display Adjustment Level 6 Select the Soak Time parameter by pressing the cel Key Soak Time 7 Use the lA Key to set the parameter to 10 The soak time unit is set in Soak Time Unit parameter in the advanced function setting level The de fault is minutes 133 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Adjustment Level 8 Select the Wait Band parameter by pressing the cel Key Wait Band 9 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 3 0 10 P
52. M EV2 4 E53 CNLIBUIN2 in the E53 AKB in the ESAN EN LIML1 500 N E5CN LIMLJ 500 for E5CN for ES5AN EN E5GN Q EV1 8 EV1i lt EV2 EV2 4 5 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function The multi SP function allows you to set up to four set points SP 0 to 3 in the adjustment level The set point can be switched by operating the keys on the front panel or by using external input signals event inputs Using Event Inputs m Two Event Inputs Event Inputs 1 and 2 The following tables show the relationship between the ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and the selected set points Number of Multi SP Uses 1 Event input 1 Selected set point OFF Set point 0 ON Set point 1 Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Event input 2 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 Using Key Operations You can select any of the set points 0 to 3 by changing the set value of the Multi SP Uses parameter The Multi SP Uses parameter display conditions are as follows e If the Controller does not support event inputs the Multi SP Uses param eter must be set to ON e If the Controller supports event inputs the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter must be set to 0 and the Multi SP Uses parameter must be set to ON 101 Using Event Inputs Section 4 5 The following table shows the relationship between the Multi SP Uses param eter set value and the selected set point Set point 0 S
53. Move to Advanced function Setting Level Note 2 Transfer output type Set Point 1999 to 9 999 1 Set None as the unit for analog inputs 23 0 to 50 mV Setting monitor range SP lower limit to SP upper limit Default transfer output upper lower limits See note 2 1 SP upper limit lower limit Set Point During SP Ramp SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP upper limit lower limit PV Temperature Input setting range lower limit to input setting range upper limit Input setting range upper lower limit Analog Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit Scaling upper lower limit MV Monitor Heat ing Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 MV Monitor Cool ing 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 2 1 Initialized when the transfer output type is changed Initialized if the input type temperature unit scaling upper lower limit or SP upper lower limit is changed when the transfer output type is SP ramp SP or PV When initialized by the initializing settings it is initialized to 100 0 0 0 3 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 293 Appendix Set value Manual MV 5 0 to 105 0 standard See note 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing See note Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is
54. OO Br pe i am or K amp l Transfer Output Upper Limit 00 O00 OO e This parameter sets the type of sensor e When this parameter is changed the set point limiter is changed to the defaults If the limiter must be specified set the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters initial setting level again Set one of the set values from the following table The defaults are as follows Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs 5 K thermocouple Controllers with Analog Inputs 7 current input 4 to 20 mA e If a platinum resistance thermometer is mistakenly connected while a set ting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in effect S ERR will be displayed To clear the S ERR display check the wiring and then cycle the power Section 5 7 Initial Setting Level Controllers with Ther mocouple Resistance Thermome ter Multi inputs Controllers with Ana log Inputs See Input type Platinum resistance thermometer Specifications Set value Input temperature range 200 to 850 C 300 to 1 500 F 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F JPt100 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F Thermocouple 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F 20 0 to 500 0 C 0 0 to 900 0
55. Page 171 RUN STOP Page 172 operation level Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 KER Soak Time Remain ee ee e This parameter measures and displays the remaining time of the soak l time for the simple program function Function Monitor range Umt Oo 9999 Monitor E Related Parameters See Program start operation level Page 171 Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 171 Operation Level Section 5 3 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 R 5 RUN STOP parameters must not be set to RUN STOP This parameter starts and stops the control operation When FuN RUN is selected control is started When StaP STOP is selected control is stopped The STOP indicator will light when control Operation The default is ALN This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to RUN STOP Alarm 1 must be assigned RAL 1 Alarm Value 1 The alarm 1 type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 1 l e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog in
56. Press the ke Key to select the Integral Time parameter Integral Time 5 Use the IA and Keys to set 250 6 Select the Derivative Time operation by pressing the cel Key Derivative Time 7 Use the lA and Keys to set 45 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key Note If ST self tuning parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level ST is exe cuted the first time operation is started and whenever the set point is changed This may cause the manually set PID constants to be overwritten with new values To retain the manually set PID constants turn OFF the ST parameter E Related Parameters See ST Self tuning initial setting level page 64 68 Alarm Outputs Section 3 9 Note Proportional Action When PID constants integral time and D derivative time are set to 0 con trol is executed according to proportional action As the default the center value of the proportional band becomes the set point Related parameter Manual reset value adjustment level When P Proportional Band Is Adjusted Increased The curve rises gradually and a long stabilization time is created but over shooting is prevented Decreas
57. Tightening torque 0 5 N m L IC bemm L O bemm max e Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Wires Changed to 10 mm from 5 to 6 mm Ferrules Changed to 8 to 12 mm from 5 to 6 mm 0 8 to 1 4 mm _ 8to 12mm Ferrules Upgraded models Insert a tool into the tool holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks and pull out the terminal block Terminal hole Note The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi nal blocks and screwless clamp terminal blocks E Ratings Previous models Upgraded models Input sensor types for ther mocouple inputs The following types of thermocouple input were added W and PLII Input range for E thermocouple 0 to 600 C Input range increased for E thermocouple 200 to 600 C Input accuracy There are no changes in thermocouple specifications for ESCN U Thermocouple 0 5 PV or 1 C which ever is greater 1 digit e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 5 PV or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit Analog input 0 5 FS 1 digit Thermocouple 0 3 PV or 1 C which ever is greater 1 digit e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 2 PV or 0 8 C whichever is greater 1 digit e Analog input 0 2 FS 1 digit Influence of signal source resistance Thermocouple 0 1 C Q except B R S 0 2 C Q B R S e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 4 C Q e Thermo
58. Using Event Inputs s rirani nag 88 5 6 E ORES BRO PR RE EER E EE Rs 99 4 6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 00 00 0000 ee eee ee 104 4 7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 0 0 106 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 0 00 00 000005 108 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level besar taseen eA cee eee 110 4 10 BV Change Color Finch 64s 8 4 cok Wao pRB A SRR RSE SEM OTe Aa 113 4 11 Alarm Delays oip och lek hak Oh Sit ee eS th a 116 4 12 Loop Burnout Alarm 0 ccc eee nen eee 118 4 13 Performing Manual Control 0 00 eee ce een eens 122 4 14 Using the Transfer Output resini noi ccc eect eee 126 xxxiii TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 15 Using the Simple Program Function 0 0 0 c eee eee 129 4 16 Output Adjustment Functions 0 0 0 cee cece eee ene 136 4 17 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter 0 0 0 e cece eee eee eee 137 4 18 Setting the Width of MV Variation 0 00 cee eee 139 4 19 Setting the PF Key oo i535 psa ee ede Sheek ba a kad 141 4 20 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations 0 0 0 cece eee eee 143 4 21 Displaying PV SV Stasi oreore rrine eee ee etree eee enes 145 4 22 Logic Operations ei 25616 r sea oe ook Sieg nd each ens ands Ra ae oad es A oa Kee 147 SECTION 5 PAP AINIELERS 556500 SG ood oe 8 ee eee eS eeateaw 157 5 1 Conventions Used in this Section
59. Work bit 1 input assignment D 0 Always OFF Invert work bit 1 Click lt gt Normally open to change itto lt Normally closed Assign RUN STOP to event input 2 Set 5 Work bit 1 for the event input data for event input 2 and set RUN STOP for the assignment function Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box Click the Close Button 154 This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Control ler to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings Logic Operations Section 4 22 Operating Procedure This procedure outputs alarm 1 status to auxiliary output 1 during operation RUN A library object is used to make the setting Alarm 1 RUN STOP Work bit 1 F Always OFF Always OFF oa aa 1 Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo wee tree and click the Start Button D Ge W ViewMode Advanced Level Wer 8 4 te te Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor Zl channelName Channet 1 CH Channel name I CHI Channel 1 ESAN RY3BT N Edt Fom Eea Control in Progress Parameters Z Protect Level E Operation Level Adjustment Level asx 2 Click the Import of Library Button Import of Library Operation of Work Bit1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil
60. Y92S 32 for DIN 48 x 24 Y92S P4 for DIN 48 x 96 278 Appendix Current Transformer CT Specifications Specifications Model number E54 CT1 E54 CT3 Max continuous current 50A 120 A See note Dielectric strength 1 000 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz 98 m s Weight Approx 11 5g Approx 50 g Accessories None Armature 2 Plug 2 Note The maximum continuous current of the ESIIN is 50 A External Dimensions E54 CT1 21 7 5 E54 CT3 2 36 dia 40 x 40 279 E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable Specifications Item Specifications Applicable OS Windows 2000 XP Vista Applicable software CX Thermo Applicable models OMRON ES5AN EN CN CN U GN Digital Temperature Control lers USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 1 1 DTE speed 38 400 bps Connector specifications Computer end USB type A plug Temperature Controller end Serial Power supply Bus power 5 VDC supplied from USB host controller Current consumption 70 mA Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C with no condensation or icing Ambient operating humidity 10 to 80 Storage temperature 20 to 60 C with no condensation or icing Storage humidity 10 to 80 Altitude 2 000 m max Weight Approx 100 g Compatible Operating Environment A personal computer that includes the follow
61. and heater overcur rent OC functions are supported Applicable to ESCN E5AN E5EN and E5GN models with heater burnout detection function Communications are supported Applicable to ESCN E5AN E5EN and E5GN models with communications User calibration of the sensor input is supported The structure is waterproof IP66 Not applicable to the ESCN U Conforms to UL CSA and IEC safety standards and EMC Directive The PV display color can be switched to make process status easy to understand at a glance This manual describes the E5CN ES5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Digital Temperature Controller and use the Digital Temperature Controller correctly according to the information provided Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference Refer to the following manual for further information on communications E5CN ESAN ES5EN ESGN Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual Basic Type Cat No H158 Refer to the following manual for information on the Advanced Type Controllers ES5CN ESAN E5EN H Digital Temperature Controllers User s Manual Advanced Type Cat No H157 Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of
62. and it is the level for moving to the user calibration and other functions To move to the communications setting level from the initial setting level press the O Key once for less than 1 s When using the communica tions function set the communications conditions in this level Communi cating with a personal computer host computer allows set points to be read and written and manipulated variables MV to be monitored To move to the calibration level input the password 1201 from the advanced function setting level The calibration level is for offsetting error in the input circuit You cannot move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel To cancel this level turn the power OFF then back ON again 1 3 1 Selecting Parameters Within each level the parameter is changed in order or in reverse order each time the Ice Key is pressed In the calibration level however param eters cannot be changed in reverse order For details refer to SECTION 5 Parameters 17 Communications Function Moves in order after C2 key Is pressed if key is 1 released within 1 s Parameter 1 co Parameter 2 co Parameter 3 After kel key is pressed 4 Parameter 4 1 3 2 Saving Settings If you press the Section 1
63. controller OUTPUT INPUT Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction com pensator When doing this be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings When the ce Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to 4 amp 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the c Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM press the kel Key while a is dis played in the No 2 display without pressing the lA Key The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 263 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 4 6 4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input In this example calibration is shown for Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with a resistance the
64. eee eee 60 32722 SCUNES is narra Reyne Re EER POE A A He a hed Rpt ee Re RS 61 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 62 3 8 1 AT Auto tuning 06 eee eens 62 3 8 2 ST Selftuming opassen e ea oe peak de eee ete aes 64 3 8 3 RT Robust Tuning 00 0 eee eee eee 66 3 8 4 Manual Setup 0 ee eee eee 68 3 9 Alarm Outputs 5 0 05 05 sp he see Ae a ees a ae 69 32921 Alarm TY peS lt 2 254i c dsb eo ei ei baa bee bb eda E 70 329227 Alarm Values secen ge oe ete ies haa A ES AREE OD 71 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 73 3 10 1 Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations 73 3 10 2 Installing Current Transformers CT 0 20 000 74 3 10 3 Calculating Detection Current Values 0 0 75 3 10 4 Application Examples 0 0 0 76 3 10 5 Settings HB Alarm 0 0 00 eee eee eee 80 3 10 6 Settings Heater Short Alarm 0 00 81 3 10 7 Settings Heater Overcurrent Alarm 0 0 82 3 11 Setting the No 3 Display con yerno 0 0 0 eee eee eee 84 3 11 1 PV SP Display Selection 0 0 eee eee 84 49 Initial Setting Examples Section 3 1 3 1 Explanation of Examples Initial Setting Examples Initial hardware setup including the sensor input type alarm types co
65. event input status and outputs the results to work bits The work bit status can be output to auxiliary or control outputs and operating status can be switched according to the work bit status Work bit logic operation can be set from 1 to 8 Set them to No operation Always OFF the default when the work bits are not to be used When logic operations are being used a dot will be displayed on the No 2 dis play of the adjustment level display Adjustment Level Adjustment level display a Dot displayed 147 Logic Operations Section 4 22 4 22 2 Using Logic Operations Logic operations are set using the CX Thermo Starting Logic There are two ways to start logic operations Operations e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo tree and click the Start Button File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help D g GA ViewMode Advanced Level Jt Pe 2B 4 S le Ge fa F CH Channel name CH1 Channel 1 5 3 ESAN RY3BT N Control in Progress Parameters Protect Level a Operation Level a Adjustment Level J Manual Control Level e Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX Thermo Options Menu File Edit View Communications TrendMonitor Options Help Ba z Temporary Settings D E ViewMode Advanc Henri Edit Channel name _ Parameter Mask Editor Logic Operation Editor Channel Name Channel 1 Parameter Name Logic Opera
66. heating operation Setting range Domn SENd Standard H L Heating cooling SENd E Related Parameters MV monitor heating Page 175 MV monitor cooling Page 176 operation level Cooling coefficient Dead band Page 189 Hysteresis heating Hysteresis cooling Page 190 adjustment level Control period heat Control period cool initial setting level Page 206 Control output 1 assignment Page 238 Control output 2 assignment Auxil iary output 1 assignment Page 240 Auxiliary output 2 assignment Page 241 Auxiliary output 3 assignment Page 242 advanced function setting level Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 The control must be set to a temper St ST self tuning ature input standard control and 2 PID control e The ST self tuning function executes tuning from the start of program l execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target When the ST function is in operation be sure to turn ON the power supply of the Function load connected to the control output simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation e Auto tuning can be started during self tuning Parameter name Setting range Unt Defaut Q ST GFF ST function OFF oN ST None i function ON Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 PID ON OFF Page 204 initial setting level ST stable i range advanced function setting level Page 224 PERN Program Pa
67. p si N E JJP ae Bee 5 iz Set control Check that E Piet H ON OFF ERE specifications control method is E5 NoE control S ON OFF control BBS aNaF PID Pra cal control Y Check alarm type q AL L l Alarm 1 Type 2 Set alarm type ae 2 12 Press the O key for at least 1 s Control starts Operation Level Use theAland B Sf ra keys to set the im PV SP i00 SP to 100 C G5 uu V2 Confirm that B R GN Runing FuN Operation control is running amp prin Stopped skaP Level poa Mun Va Use the A and eh Al E IH Set alarm values keys to set the j5__ p Alarm Value 1 28 Aam valueto Ea 20 Va 50 Start operation Start operation Initial Setting Examples Section 3 1 Example 2 Input type 9 T thermocouple 200 C to 400 C Control method PID control PID constants found using auto tuning AT Alarm type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 30 C Set point 150 C Setup Procedure Power ON l Power ON Operation Level J g7 g 5 PV SP BBS a Press the O key for at least 3 s Initial Settin p Level i Initial Setting Control stops m Level i Use theAland B N E 3 Ssoieations D keys to cia g Input Type 9 Spee select the input G50 ype Ts Use the A and ON OFF oNaF For PID set Ped 5 MLI Set control keys to select g ENEL control specifications PID control Bes Ped pip Prd J
68. refer to 4 19 Setting the PF Key For details on setting events refer to 4 5 Using Event Inputs Summary of Alarm The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm Type Operation parameter is set to lower limit alarm with standby sequence and close in alarm is set Alarm type Lower limit alarm with standby sequence aa ee ee ee ee PVA Alarm value gt f4 i Q ae T Alarm hysteresis A gt Time Alarm OFF paseman ON closed Output OU LL OFF open Parameters Symbol Parameter level AL He Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis Initial setting level Alarm RESE Standby Sequence Advanced function setting level Alarm Note tod 4 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 4 3 1 Analog Input Scali _ When an analog input is selected scaling can be performed as needed caling Upper Limit See e N H by the control application e Scaling is set in the Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit and Deci o N L S Lower Limit mal Point parameters initial setting level These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input is selected ge Pea Point The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit value of input The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of digits be
69. 0 2 eee eee eens 158 5 2 Protect Level es snstt esc4 nia e sh bis r E he eat ek ile ds te 159 5 3 Operation evel va it tad ee E EEE Bh ee RIE a eh Ce OR A RIL ESOS e Sy 163 2 4 Adjustment Level serre ahs csr wilde Bh e Show eee RE bo keto s Bed poh ea ae eee 177 5 5 Monitor Setting Item Level 0 0 eee eens 196 5 6 Manual Control Level 0 cee ences 197 S Initial Settini Levels cond amp adie ease SAA BG AES Pep A yes Aes Ae oe 199 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level 0 0 eee eee 218 5 9 Communications Setting Level 0 0 0 eee ee 255 SECTION 6 CALIBRATION wscsect else cine egies sheet eyes ees LOL 6 1 Parameter Structure oc cae Shas oy aes bade eed bales aaa sees 258 6 2 User Calibration sa 2 lt tage e E vee ches wba ee Rhus Sate nhage hareebices 260 6 3 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 260 6 4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 00 000 e eee ee eee 264 6 5 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 265 6 6 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 0 00 0 0 eee ee eee 267 6 7 Checking Indication Accuracy 0 0 cece nee ences 270 ADPCNGIN siconde ta See eee a E ee ee tae doe 78 Mdk o5 tinh seed abies tate bean fda cae cutee ates OUP Revision History 300 s0c0c63eceuss vores tecuese ies S17 XXXiv About this Manual
70. 0 1 mA max Polarities during no contact input are as follows AEV s EV1 p EVI n Psa EV2 EV2 Or Da EV2 E53 CNOBON2 in E53 AKB in the E5GN OO0B the E5CN 1M 1 500 ESAN EN LIML1 500 N for ESCN for ESAN EN 41 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 CT Inputs e When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the ESCN LIMLI 500 with an E53 CNOH HHON2 Option Unit con nect a current transformer CT across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 13 and 15 no polarity e When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the E5AN EN OOHO 500 N or E5AN EN LILIHHL 500 N connect a current transformer CT across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 15 and 16 no polarity e When using the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm with the E5GN HO connect the current transformer CT across terminals 7 and 8 no polarity be fem fe Be E53 CNUILIHLIN2 TW ESS CNOHHEN2 s ESAN EN CICIH 500 N ESAN EN CIIHH1 500 N for E5CN E5GN LILIH Communications RS 485 When communications are to be used with the E5LIN 03 connect communications cable across terminals 11 and 12 terminals 21 and 22 or terminals 7 and 8
71. 1 arm Value Lower imit 1 arm Value 2 arm Value Upper imit 2 arm Value Lower imit 2 arm Value 3 arm Value Upper imit 3 arm Value Lower Limit 3 MV Monitor Heating MV Monitor Cooling For details on the displays of Controllers with a No 3 display E5AN EN refer to Process Value Set Point on page 165 Operation Level Section 5 3 The Additional PV Display parameter Process Value must be set to ON The process value is displayed on the No 1 display and nothing is displayed l on the No 2 and No 3 E5AN EN only displays Function Monitor range Un L Process value Temperature According to indication range for EU each sensor Monitor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting The default setting is for a K thermocouple 5 An 5 EFF error will be displayed if the input type setting is incorrect To clear the 5 FF error correct the input type or wiring and then cycle the power E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit Page 203 ini tial setting level Process Value Set Point Display 1 Process Value Set Point Display 2 ESAN EN onl
72. 1 or 2 OFF When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to MANU auto manual manual control will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON Auto control will start when the input turns OFF The MANU indicator will light during manual control Event input 1 or 2 Automatic Event input 1 or 2 Manual When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to PRST program start the program will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the RUN STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode If the program END out put is ON the program END output will turn OFF Event input 1 or 2 Event input 1 or 2 When DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation is set for the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter and the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set for reverse operation control starts with direct operation cooling control when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and control starts with reverse operation heating control when the event input turns OFF Direct Reverse Operation parameter Event input OFF Direct operation cooling Direct operation cooling lore Reverse operation heating Reverse operation heating 103 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values Section 4 6 Direct Reverse Operation parameter Switching 100 AT Execute Cancel Switching 40 AT Execut
73. 105 0 E Related Parameters See MV display advanced function setting level Page 227 175 Operation Level Section 5 3 The control system must be set to pass heating cooling control g MV Monitor Cooling The MV Display parameter must be set to ON m This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the cooling con trol output during operation e This parameter cannot be set e During heating cooling control the manipulated variable on the control output cooling is monitored e The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed E Control Monitorrange Unt Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 4 Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 MV display advanced function setting level Page 227 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 5 4 Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT auto tuning and other operations and for set control parameters This level provides the basic Controller parameters for PID control propor tional band integral time derivative time and heating cooling control Operation Level Adjustment Level O Key less than 1 s Control in progress To move to the adjustment level from the operation level press the O Key Press the once e The set points 0 to 3 in the adjustment level are the set values for switch ing the set point during mul
74. 2 173 alarm value 3 173 alarm value lower limit 1 174 alarm value lower limit 2 174 alarm value lower limit 3 175 alarm value upper limit 1 174 alarm value upper limit 2 174 alarm value upper limit 3 175 alpha 224 AT calculated gain 225 AT execute cancel 179 AT hysteresis 225 auto manual select addition 234 auto manual switch 166 automatic cooling coefficient adjustment 245 automatic display return time 227 auxiliary output 1 assignment 240 auxiliary output 1 open in alarm 222 auxiliary output 2 assignment 241 auxiliary output 2 open in alarm 222 auxiliary output 3 assignment 242 auxiliary output 3 open in alarm 222 character select 243 cold junction compensation method 229 communications baud rate 255 communications data length 255 communications parity 255 communications stop bits 255 communications Unit No 255 communications writing 180 control output 1 assignment 238 control output 1 ON OFF count alarm set value 253 control output 1 ON OFF count monitor 252 control output 2 assignment 239 control output 2 ON OFF count alarm set value 253 control output 2 ON OFF count monitor 252 control period cooling 206 control period heating 206 cooling coefficient 189 Index dead band 189 decimal point 202 derivative time 188 direct reverse operation 206 display refresh period 251 event input assignment 216 extended function 254 extraction of square root en
75. 4 down the parameter will move each second in reverse order While the el key is being held A l i l 1 l 1 3 l l 1 1 l l i l Parameter 2 l i been held down for 2 s Parameter 3 Hold down the kel key during this interval After Cel key has been held down for 1s 1 A After ce key has I I I I I I I I I I ice Key at the final parameter the display returns to the top parameter for the current level To change parameter settings specify the setting using the IA or Key and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press the c Key This saves the setting When another level is selected after a setting has been changed the con tents of the parameter prior to the change is saved When you turn the power OFF you must first save the settings by press ing the el Key The settings are sometimes not changed by merely pressing the A or x Keys 1 4 Communications Function The E5CN AN EN GN are provided with a communications function that enables parameters to be checked and set from a host computer If the com munications function is required use the E53 CNOO3N2 with the E5CN or the E53 EN03 or E53 EN01 with the E5AN EN GN For details on the com munications function see the separate Communications Manual Basic Type
76. 99909999 EU o Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point N Page 202 Alarm 1 type Page 207 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level ALH Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Alarm 2 mi be pam np ho e alarm 2 type must not be 1 4 or Ai el Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 5 Function a Setting See These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 2 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 2 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unt Default 00099 EU fo E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point Page 202 Alarm 2 type Page 209 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Operation Level Section 5 3 pam x J Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 Alarm 3 must be assigned ne The alarm 3 type must not be
77. CT input The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal and 10 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows 76 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Normal current Heater burnout current Heater burnout detection current 5 _ 15 10 2 12 5 A Three phase Heaters Delta Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 17 3 A gt Product Product To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 17 3 A V3 x 10 A Burnout Burnout 10 A gt Burnout Burnout 200V Product To CT input Product To CT input Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 Ax V3 x Current when there is a burnout 10 A x V3 x V3 2 15 A 1 V3 10A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current 17 3 15 2 16 1 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 17 3 10 2 13 65 A To enable detection in either case use 16 1 A as the heater burnout detection current 77 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Star Connecting Lines Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal 5 8 A gt 200
78. Change Calculation 245 o ON OFF Count 253 J eC 5 Period T Alarm Set Value g pyg Additional PVY _ MV at Stop and i i E Az Control Output 2 BS gir Display 226 H Error Addition 233 ee 245 a ne ON OFF Count aoe J 3 Adjustment V2 tiie E a dP MV Display 227 Auto Manual 234 Menten E PAC ounter 554 Bes EF Select Addition SVEN ES i Reset za Use E REE peuomene RT Heater B Nat Move to Eos SFE Distiay Return 227 234 Laan E 246 iss o Calibration Level 294 ze ile 3 Latch 12 E ExFN Extended 254 EBs Function Alles 219 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 NLE Parameter Initialization e This parameter returns all parameter settings to their defaults e After the initialization the set value automatically turns oF F Function singren J Dom A aFF Initialization is not executed FALE Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual Setting The model must not support event MSPU Multi SP Uses inputs or the number of multi SP uses must be 0 This parameter enables switching between set points 0 to 3 by operating the l keys on the front panel Function Prerequisites A model without event inputs e The Number of Multi SP Uses parameter set to 0 on a model with event inputs oN Set points 0 to 3 can be selected a aFF Set points 0 to 3 cannot be selected f Default OFF Setting E Related Parameters See Multi SP set point settin
79. Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter to 10 1 000 times Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press Move to Ad ing the cei Key vanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 3 Use the Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to Parame ter the advanced function setting level by either pressing the ce Key or wait Initialization ing two seconds without pressing any key Control Output 4 Press the Eel Key to select the Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set 1 ON OFF Value parameter Count Alarm Set Value 5 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 10 Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value Initial Setting Level 6 Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev Input Type el Operation Level 7 Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the operation level ALM 4 21 Displaying PV SV
80. Controllers with heater burnout HS and heater overcurrent alarms an OR output is established between the ALM 1 function and the alarms If the ALM1 function is to be used for the heater burnout HS and heater overcurrent alarms only set 0 as the alarm 1 type i e do not use ALM1 Turn the heater power ON simultaneously or before turning ON the E5LIN power If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the E5AN power the HB alarm will be activated Control is continued even when the heater burnout HS or heater over current alarm is active The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor and Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameters to check the actual current being used If there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through once will double the detection current Load line CT 3 10 2 Installing Current Transformers CT Single phase Heaters Three phase Heaters E5AN Heater Detection Models 74 1 2 3 e This
81. Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays 2 Page 283 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON Hbg Heater Burnout Detection 2 This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls l below the setting of this parameter e When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON a Setting range Unit Default Bows a o Function Setting E Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor adjustment level Page 182 HB ON OFF Heater burnout latch Heater burnout hysteresis advanced func tion setting level Page 222 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs gt p ale Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 Alam 4 must Ke assinei The Heater Overcurrent Use param eter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the value set for this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the heater overc
82. Input type initial setting level Page 200 MYSE MV at Stop and Error Addition oa must be set to 2 PID This parameter sets whether or not the MV at Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to be displayed e Set whether or not the MV at Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to l be displayed Function Setting range Default A oN Displayed aF F Not displayed Setting E Related Parameters See MV at stop MV at PV error adjustment level Page 192 233 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 AMAd Auto Manual Select Addition The control must be set to 2 PID control This parameter sets whether the Auto Manual Switch parameter is to be dis played e Set whether the Auto Manual Switch parameter is to be displayed Function o Seningrane Dotat oN Displayed aF F Not displayed oFF Setting E Related Parameters See Auto manual switch operation level Page 166 The control must be set to 2 PID PE RT control Function A Setting The input type must be set to tem perature input This parameter executes robust tuning RT e When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automat ically set which make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object characteristics are changed e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur
83. Key for less than one second 3 10 6 Settings Heater Short Alarm To activate the HS alarm set the HS Alarm Use parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the HS Alarm 1 and HS Alarm 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the HS Alarm 1 parameter to 2 5 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The HS Alarm Use parameter setting is already ON by default so set the HS Alarm 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ce Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Ad Input Type x h vanced Function Setting Level Initial Setting Level 3 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level HS Alarm 4 Select the HS Alarm Use parame
84. Limit See note 4 Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 300 Appendix Changed Scaling Stan Pro Trans parameter Lower dard or gram _ fer Out Related initial Limit Heat Pattern put ized parame Scaling ing Type ters Upper Cooling Limit Related param Analog eter initializa input tion execution condition Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 Move to Protect Level MV Display Selection Temperature Input Shift Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Dead Band Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis Cooling Wait Band Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis ST Stable Range AT Hysteresis PV Stable Band LBA Level LBA Band Note 1 Initialized to input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits 2 Clamped by SP upper and lower limits 3 Initialized only when the input type is changed to analog input when RT turns ON The defaults are as follows RT OFF Proportional band 8 0 Integral time 233 Derivative time 40 4 Initialization is performed as shown below according to the transfer output type setting The initial ization differs depending on the ch
85. Multi SP on the Process Value Set Point to 2 display The PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter is set 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the kel Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter 3 Use the Key to enter the password 169 It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the c Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key 4 Press the kel Key to select the PV SP Display Screen Selection parame ter 5 Use the A and Keys to set Z 6 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level 7 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level The MV will be displayed on the No 3 display 8 Press the kel Key to confirm that the Multi SP is displayed on the No 3 display 85 Setting the No 3 Display Section 3 11 86 SECTION 4 Applications Operations This section describes scaling the SP ramp function and other special functions that can be used to make the most of the functionality of the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers 4 1 Shifting Input Values 00 00 ee eee eee 89 4
86. Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 191 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 The control must be set to 2 PID z fa control 5 MV at Stop The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON e This parameter sets the MV to use when the RUN STOP status changes l from RUN to STOP Function Setting range 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control Setting E Related Parameters See RUN STOP operation level Page 172 MV at stop and error addition advanced function setting level Page 233 The control must be set to 2 PID MI control MY E MV at PV Error The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON N e This parameter sets the MV to use when an input error occurs Function AD 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control Soningrangs Um Doran Setting E Related Parameters See MV at stop and error addition advanced function setting level Page 233 192 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 The ST parameter must be set to SPRE SP Ramp Set Value OFF e This parameter sets the rate of change during SP ramp operation Set the maximum permissible change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value The SP ramp function is disabled if this parameter is set to OFF Feneuon e During tempe
87. Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations The END display is cleared and the program END output turns OFF e Key operations are used to switch the RUN STOP status to RUN with the Program Start parameter set to RSET stopped Normal control operation is started e The Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT after the process value stabilizes The RUN STOP status remains as RUN e Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to STOP during program operation e Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band Measuring the soak time stops when the pro cess value leaves the wait band e Key operations are used to change the RUN STOP status to RUN e Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band continuing from the time between 7 and 9 The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the measured time reaches the soak time END flashes on the No 2 display and the program END output turns ON 135 Output Adjustment Functions Section 4 16 4 16 Output Adjustment Functions 4 16 1 Output Limits e Output limits can be set to control the output using the upper and lower limits to the calculated MV e The following MV takes priority over the MV limits Manual MV See note MV at stop MV at PV error Output MV upper limit MV lower limit Note When the manual MV limit is enabled t
88. Setting range oN Enabled aF F Disabled i Ti mT Setting E Related Parameters See MV upper limit MV lower limit adjustment level Page 193 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 RP PV Rate of Change Calculation Period fhe nam yno mustbo salo a e The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Dif ferences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the results exceed the alarm value Function e The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms sampling period a Settingrange Um Deam 1 to 999 Sampling period 4 1s Setting E Related Parameters See Present value Process value set point operation level Page 165 Alarm 1 to 3 type Initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 Per Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust The control must be set to heating SCA L ment cooling control and 2 PID control e By setting the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter to ON autotuning can be executed during heating cooling control to auto matically calculate the cooling coefficient at the same time as the PID parameters If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteris tics such as when cooling water boils for cooling control it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Controller and control may take the form of oscillating waves If that occurs increase the proport
89. Status 4 21 1 PV and SV Status Display Functions PV Status Display The PV in the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Display and the control and alarm Function status specified for the PV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles Set value Function No PV status display MANU is alternately displayed during manual control STOP is alternately displayed while oper ation is stopped ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status 145 Displaying PV SV Status SV Status Display Function 146 Set value Alarm 3 Section 4 21 Function ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status Alarm 1 to 3 OR status ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON Heater Alarm See note The default is OFF HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater over current alarm is ON HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection but the function will be disabled Example When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function When RUN STOP Normal T 3 L Coon Ir oo I Lim PV SP 3 LI OU O00 is STOP oer i G oe Alternating oO display COCIen mn ooo LILI lt e C1 The SP Blank or Manual MV in the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Display and the c
90. The Temperature Controller can be removed from the case to perform mainte nance without removing the terminal leads This is possible for only the E5CN E5AN and E5EN and not for the ESCN U or E5GN Check the specifications of the case and Temperature Controller before removing the Temperature Controller from the case E5CN Flat blade screwdriver Unit mm kl 20 min ka PLL LENA 1 2 3 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks 2 Insert the flat blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case and pull out the front panel slightly Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you without applying unnec essary force 3 When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other make sure that the sealing rubber is in place and press the E5CN toward the rear case into position While pushing the E5CN into place push down on the hooks on the top and bot tom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case into position Bottom View of the E5CN 28 Installation
91. Use a ratchet to alternately tighten the screws on the top and bottom Mounting Brackets little by little to maintain balance until the ratchet turns freely Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53 COV16 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction 26 Installation E5GN 1 2 3 Section 2 1 NR CN eis y _ yA e Mfg gt EN Slightly bend the IES E53 COV16 Terminal Cover in j meng the direction shown KEES by the arrows to aol attach it to the terminal block I fo wel H lt a l Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section Mounting to the Panel 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the water proofing function Insert the E5GN into the mounting hole in the panel Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and temporarily fasten the E5GN Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m Panel Waterproof packing 27 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case
92. Use the following procedure to move to the communications setting level 18 1 2 3 1 Press the LO Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation lev el to the initial setting level 2 Press the LO Key for less than one second to move from the initial setting level to the communications setting level 3 Select the parameters as shown below by pressing the kel Key 4 Press the A or y Key to change the parameter setting Communications Function Section 1 4 Protocol Setting 00 0000 faa Mgl Communications Unit No i l og 000 o po Communications Baud Rate mi En Communications Data Length nj See note 00 0000 OO oF al Communications Stop Bits See note goo Lin ce ry ne o0 o 00 or L l ines a PREY Communications Parity 00 0000 00 oF L Send Data Wait Time Note The Protocol Setting parameter is displayed only when CompoWay F commu nications are being used Setting Communications Match the communications specifications of the E5CN AN EN GN and the Data host computer If a 1 N connection is being used ensure that the communica tions specifications for all devices in the system except the communications Unit No are the same Parameter name Seiting monitor value Selection symbols Default Protocol Setting bs CompoWay F SYSWAY CompoWay F Modbus SYSWA
93. V Load such as a heater 200 V Product To CT input 5 8 A gt Lh Product To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 5 8 A 10 A x 1 V3 Burnout Burnout By gt m 200 200 200 V 200 V 200 V Product 200 V Product To CT input To CT input Lp Lp Product Product To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 V3 Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 V3 x V3 2 5 A x V3 2 5 A The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is 5 4 A 5 8 5 2 78 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 V Connecting Lines Example Using Two 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Product To CT input Product To CT input Burnout 200 V Product 200 V Product To CT input To CT input yY 10 A gt Product To CT input Product To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 1 2 Current when there is a burnout 0 A A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current 10 5 2 7 5 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current 10 0 2 5 A To enable detection in either case use 7 5 A as the heater burnout detection current 79 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarm
94. When AT or ST is executed with RT selected PID constants are automat ically set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when the characteristics of the controlled object are changed RT can be set in the advanced function setting level when PID control has been set The RT mode cannot be selected while an analog input is set e Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring e When the set temperature is not constant and is changed in a wide range e When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem peratures e When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow e When heater characteristics change depending on the temperature e When an actuator with disproportional I O such as a phase control type power regulator is used e When a rapidly heating heater is used e When the control object or sensor has much loss time e When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason PID constants are initialized to the factory settings by switching to RT mode e When the RT mode is selected the derivative time setting unit be comes the second RT Features e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Temperature Temperature Much hunting occurs Hunting
95. With Control Output 1 and 2 ON OFF outputs relay outputs or voltage outputs for driving SSR the number of times that a control output turns ON and OFF can be counted Based on the control output ON OFF count alarm set value an alarm can be output and an error can be displayed if the set count value is exceeded The default setting of the Control Output ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter is 0 ON OFF operations are not counted when this parameter is set to 0 To enable counting ON OFF operations change the setting to a value other than 0 143 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations Control Output ON OFF Counter Monitor Function Control Output ON OFF Count Alarm Function Section 4 20 This function is not displayed when the Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Set ting and the Control Output 2 ON OFF Alarm Setting parameter are set to 0 or when the control outputs are set for linear outputs Setting range Uni Default Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 100 times O 100 times O Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor Display When ON OFF Count Alarm Occurs When an ON OFF count alarm occurs the PV display in the No 1 display shown below alternates with the FAL display on the No 2 display PV e PV SP Including the items displayed by setting the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter e PV Manual MV PV SP Manual MV e PV SP displayed for the monitor setting
96. a long life relay output see note The out put will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected Note Long life relay outputs are not supported for the E5GN Alarms e Set the alarm type and alarm value or the alarm value upper and lower limits e If necessary a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting a standby sequence alarm hysteresis auxiliary output close in alarm open in alarm alarm latch alarm ON delay and alarm OFF delay If the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON the output assigned to alarm 1 function will turn ON when an input error occurs Control Adjustment Optimum PID constants can be set easily by performing AT auto tuning or ST self tuning With the E53 CNOBON2 for the E5CN or the E5AN EN LIMLI 500 N with the E53 AKB for the E5AN EN the following functions can be exe cuted using event inputs switching set points multi SP 4 points max switching RUN STOP switching between automatic and manual opera tion starting resetting the program inverting direct reverse operation 100 AT execute cancel 40 AT execute cancel setting change enable disable and canceling the alarm latch Heater Burnout HS Alarm With the E53 CNOHON2 or E53 CNOHHON2 for the E5CN or the and Heater Overcurrent E5AN EN CIDHO 500 N or E5AN EN CIDHHO 500 N the heater burn out detection function HS alarm function and heater overcurrent detec tion function can be used Event Inputs
97. alarm output 1 When the program pattern is not OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to program end output The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is not initialized for the ES5GN however if it is set for heating cooling control 8 If the Program Start parameter is assigned when the program pattern is changed to OFF the Pro gram Start parameter will be initialized to not assigned 9 Initialized when temperature inputs are used and RT is changed The defaults are as follows Proportional band 8 0 Integral time 233 Derivative time 40 when RT is OFF and 40 0 when RT is ON 10 The proportional band integral time and derivative time are initialized as follows by RT and input type changes e When RT is turned from ON to OFF by a change from temperature input to analog input e When ON is turned to OFF or OFF is turned to ON by an RT change 11 Write to both so that the SP and the currently selected Multi SP SPO to SP3 match 12 Initializes event input assignments used for Multi SP to NONE 13 Initialized to 0 8 when the temperature unit is C and to 1 4 when the temperature unit is F Appendix Sensor Input Setting Range Indication Range Control Range Control lers with Thermo couple Resis tance Ther mome ter Multi inputs Input type Resistance ther mometer Specifications Set value Input setting range 200 to 850 C 300 to 1 500 F Input indic
98. below Set the communications conditions for the CX Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table Communications Unit No 01 Communications baud rate 38 4 kbps Communications data length 7 bits Communications stop bits 2 bits Communications parity Even 47 Using the Support Software Port 48 Section 2 3 SECTION 3 Basic Operation This section describes the basic operation of the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers including key operations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples 3 1 Initial Setting Examples 00 0 e eee eee ee eee 50 3 2 Setting the Input Type cs onsas caer a Vas ead s R EAE eRe 52 3 2 1 Input Type ce e a A eee beh wee E E ENE S 52 3 3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 54 3 3 1 Temperature Unit ipe osere enep pe iaaa eee eee 54 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control 0 000 54 3 5 Setting Output Specifications 0 0 eee eee 54 3 9 1 Control Periods anun ue e E hee Mace EE Ree OEE ERS 54 3 5 2 Direct and Reverse Operation 00 00 00 0000 55 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions 0 00000000000 56 3 6 Setting the Set Point SP 0 eee cee eens 59 3 6 1 Changing the SP 2 eee eee eee 59 3 7 Using ON OFF Control 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 60 3 7 1 ON OFF Control 0 0 0 0
99. cooling control Hysteresis Heating Adjustment level ON OFF control Hysteresis Cooling Adjustment level ON OFF control 3 7 2 Settings To execute ON OFF control set the Set Point PID ON OFF and Hysteresis parameters Setting the PID ON OFF Parameter Operating Procedure Confirm that the PID ON OFF parameter is set to aNaF in the initial setting level Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 3 itial Setting Level 2 The Input Type parameter is displayed in the initial setting level Input Type PID ON OFF 3 Select the PID ON OFF parameter by pressing the kel Key 4 Check that the set value is aNaF i e the default 5 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second Next set the set point value Setting the SP Operating Procedure In this example the set point is set to 200 The set value i e the SP is shown at the bottom of the display Operation Level 1 Select the Process Value Set Point parameter in the operation level PV SP 2 Use the Al and Keys to set the SP In this example it is set to 200 The new
100. diagram below shows the required device connections Make sure that the ESCN CN U AN EN GN and cold junction compensator are con nected by a compensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation ch Input power suppl me dale Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor l nput power supply Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor E5AN EN re Input power suppl purp ery Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor Q Input power suppl peu teases Cold junction compensator Compensating conductor Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0 C and set the STV output to the voltage equivalent of the starting power of the check value The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not required when an external cold junction compensation method is used 270 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 6 7 2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer e Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections py Input power supply L Input power supply n mi Input power supply m Input power supply Sal e Operation Set the 6 dial to the resistance equivalent to the check value 271 Checking Indication Accuracy 6 7 3 Analog Input 272 e Preparations Section 6 7 The diagram below shows the required device connections The connection terminals depend on the model and input type Controlle
101. e The design has been changed e Added characters MANU SUB1 SUB2 and HA e Display area dimensions 36 8 x 10 1 mm W x H Previous models Upgraded models Body Labels E5GN Box Labels E5GN Body labels 3 Model number Refer to the model num ber legend Lot No Year of manufacture last digit of ear 020900 1 2 Manufacture day 01 to 31 3 Manufacture month 1 to 9 X Y and Z January to December 4 Last digit of year 5 6 Manufacturing factory code Top of Controller Bottom of Controller No ID number TYPE E5GN RTC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER E ERANGE VOLTS 100 240 VAC LOT No xxxx QYT 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA Body labels All labels combined into one la bel Model number Refer to the model number legend Lot No Year of manufacture last two digits of year DOO OOD 1 2 Manufacture day 01 to 31 3 Manufacture month 1 to 9 X Y and Z Janu ary to December 4 5 Year of manufacture last two digits of year 6 7 Manufacturing factory code omron ESGN RIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Top of Controller N6 has been added to identify the new mod els TYPE ESGN RT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TENP MULT 1 RANGE VOLTS 100 240 YAC Ne LOT No QYT OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA XX X Conventions Used in This Manual Mo
102. fie protect ch restricts movament Bo OB CompoWay F ry E 0 the initial setting communications Eesi b SYSWAY onl y 2 g5P 3 5P8 pis and advanced incon stg fz t only 4 When the PF Setting parameter is Eon CE levels i m Z E NEPE Setting Change Protect B 1 EN Communications set to A M for a Controller with a ca e nE Protects changes to setups by ER Data Length MV Lower Limit _GFF operating the front panel keys 7 PF Key ES5AN EN E 2 F PF Key Protect B Gb peommaualeations E PFPE ey A B 201 t Stop Bits i E Restricts PF key operation B T MV Change Rate Limit B SFE EBANEN only gt B e 2 When the PF Setting parameter is E iz set to PFDP for a Controller with a amp Mc n Parameter Mask Enable E Communications Parity a PMI aea aaa e B PRES PF Key ESAN EN Extraction of Square Root z aN OPHIR EEE Eee EKEN Low cut Point IE ce I ce E Po p Password to Move to Protect Level E C471 Send Data Wait Time B PR a Password setting S 5dWE Ezi B 20l 306 Appendix Monitor Setting Item Level E5AN EN only co B FG Monitor setting PF 3 Item Display1 gt Monitor Setting Item Display 2 ppm pooo g Monitor Setting Item Display 3 ppor Monitor Setting Item Display 4 Note The monitor setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parame
103. for E5GN and 600 Q max for other models Resolution Approx 10 000 275 Appendix Auxiliary output E5CN SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 E5CN U operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA E5AN SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 E5EN operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA E5GN SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Control method 2 PID or ON OFF control Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11 segment 7 segment digital display and single lighting indicator Other functions Depend on the model Ambient temperature 10 to 55 C with no condensation or icing with 3 year guarantee 10 to 50 C Ambient humidity 25 to 85 Storage temperature 25 to 65 C with no condensation or icing Altitude 2 000 m or less Recommended fuse T2A 250 VAC time lag low shut off capacity Installation environment Installation Category II Pollution Class 2 IEC 61010 1 compliant Note 1 For the setting ranges for each sensor input see page 303 2 When connecting the ES2 THB connect it 1 1 3 Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switchi
104. function can be used with E5CIN models that have the HB alarm HS alarm and OC alarm For the E5CN connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 CT1 or 13 and 15 CT2 For the E5AN E5EN connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 CT1 or 15 and 16 CT2 For the E5GN connect the CT in advance to terminals 7 and 8 CT1 Then pass the heater power line through the CT s hole For specifications models and dimensions of current transformers that can be used with this Controller refer to Appen dix Current Transformer CT on page 279 For single phase heaters install the CT in the position shown in the following diagram Load such as a heater AC line 3 eler Product To CT input HHO N E5EN OOHHL N and E53 CNOCOHHN2 for E5CN 3 phase When a 3 phase power supply is used regardless of the types of connecting lines two current transformers CTs are required to detect heater burnout HS and OC 1 Delta connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 Load such as a heater AC line Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input 2 Star connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT ins
105. heating cooling control 95 189 193 204 cooling coefficient 97 189 dead band 97 189 setting 98 HS alarm 13 73 276 310 settings 82 HS Alarm error display 283 hysteresis 60 62 T O configuration 6 basic model ESAN 9 ESCN 6 ESCN U 7 ESEN 9 ESGN 11 main functions 12 indication accuracy 270 indicators explanation 4 operation 4 infrared temperature sensor 270 initial setting level 17 199 parameter operation list 291 initial setting communications protect 110 initial settings 50 examples 50 51 initialization 220 Input Error error display 281 input sensor types 12 200 input shift 89 one point shift 89 two point shift 90 calculating 90 input types 52 303 default values 200 list 53 setting 52 inputs wiring 36 installation 22 25 ESAN ESEN mounting the terminal cover 26 mounting to the panel 26 ESCN ESCN U mounting the terminal cover 26 mounting to the panel 25 ESGN mounting to the panel 27 panel cutout ESAN 24 ESCN 24 ESCN U 24 ESEN 24 ESGN 25 removing from case ESAN 29 ESCN 28 ESEN 29 removing the terminal block ESGN 30 integral time 68 188 K keys down key 5 key operations 15 level key 5 mode key 5 operations 5 up key 5 L LBA loop burnout alarm 118 band 119 detection time 119 120 level 119 120 level key 5 loop burnout alarm LBA 118 main functions 12 manual control 103 122 manual control
106. is illustrated in Figure 3 c il A _ After shifting pritroler one AL Upper limit temperature input YH Set temperature upper limit shift value e g 52 7 G LNSH C e g 260 C a a ie ae Before shifting X2 Controller readout after shifting e g 110 C Y2 Controller readout before shifting 3 e g 105 C YT Controller readout before shifting e g 40 C X1 Controller readout after shifting 7 e g 25 C IF i l Lower limit temperare input A y4 Room tem 260 C per a ature e g 25 C X2 Near set point e g 110 C shift value e g 27 3 C CNSL 0 YL Set temperature lower limit e g 0 C gt Control target temperature B Figure 3 Illustration of 2 Point Shift a Lower limit temperature input shift value LN x X2 Y2 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 b Upper limit temperature input shift value u_ YH Y1 Y2 Y1 x X2 Y2 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 3 After setting the calculated values to L NSL and c NSH check the Controller readout A and thermometer temperature B 4 Here offsets are set at two points near room temperature and near the set point To improve accuracy within the measurement temperature range another point in the measurement temperature range other than the set point should be set instead of room temperature 92 Alarm Hysteresis Section 4 2 Example of a 2 point In this example we use
107. items Normal ON OFF Count Alarm Se mia 1E Alternating Pv sP E co L display Bes 0g S55 ALM e iiO If the ON OFF counter exceeds the control output ON OFF count alarm set value an ON OFF count alarm will occur The alarm status can be assigned to a control output or an auxiliary output or it can be displayed at the Control ler The ON OFF count alarm set value function is disabled by setting the ON OFF count alarm set value to 0 Seting range Unt beaut Control Output 1 ON OFF Alarm Set 0 to 9999 ting 100 times Control Output 2 ON OFF Alarm Set 0 to 9999 ting 100 times ON OFF Counter Reset Function Parameter name ON OFF Counter Reset Note 144 The ON OFF counter can be reset for a specific control output Setting range Default 0 Disable the counter reset function 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter After the counter has been reset the control output ON OFF count monitor value will be automatically returned to 0 If an error occurs in the control output ON OFF counter data the ON OFF count monitor value will be set to 9999 and an ON OFF count alarm will occur The alarm can be cleared by resetting the ON OFF counter Displaying PV SV Status Section 4 21 Operating Procedure This procedure sets the
108. l depending on the model N I O Configuration and Main Functions E5CN U Temperature input or analog input Control Control output section heating Control output cooling ms Input error Program end output Heating cooling Standard gt Section 1 2 Control output 1 gt Auxiliary output 2 Auxiliary output 1 Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign ment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level I O Configuration and Main Functions Model Number Structure Model Number Legend Note Controllers E5CN LILIMLIL Ll 500 12345 6 7 1 Control Output 1 R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current output Y Long life relay output hybrid 1 2 Auxiliary Outputs 2 Blank None 2 Two outputs 3 Option M Option Unit can be mounted 4 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer L Analog current voltage input 5 Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC 6 Case Color Blank Black W Silver 7 Terminal Cover 500 With terminal cover E5CN U 1234 1 Output Type R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current outp
109. least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level di Temperature 3 To return to the operation level press the Unit Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the ce Key Input Type Poran the Al or Key to select either C or F EPG F F O Key for at least one second 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control Two control methods are supported 2 PID control and ON OFF control Switching between 2 PID control and ON OFF control is executed by means of the PID ON OFF parameter in the initial setting level When this parameter is set to Pid 2 PID control is selected and when set to aNaF ON OFF con trol is selected The default is ANAF 2 PID Control PID control is set by AT auto tuning ST self tuning or manual setting For PID control set the PID constants in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point reverse operation 3 5 Setting Output Specifications 3 5 1 Control Periods Con
110. level Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter advanced function setting level The Controller moves to the protect level and the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is displayed Press the kel Key once to move to the Initial Setting Communications Pro tect parameter Set the set value to 0 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Operation Level 5 Operation Level nitial Setting Level Input Type nitial Setting Level Move to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization itial Setting Level Input Type Section 4 8 5 Press the lO and cel Keys simultaneously for at least one second to re turn to the operation level 6 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the O Key for at least three seconds level to the initial setting level to move from the operation 7 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key 8 Press the Key enter the password 169 and then either press the
111. monitor the manipulated variable and perform other operations in this level In the advanced function setting level you can set a parameter to hide or show the set points Adjustment Level Press the Operation Level O Key less than 1 s Press the O Key for at _ __ least 1 s display will flash Press the O Key TI for at least 1 s 17 Press the O Key for at least 3 s Control stops mimm Communi Initial Setting Level gt cations ttin eel C Control in progress Press the O Key for less than 1 s m Control stopped This level is displayed immediately after the power is turned ON To move to other levels press the O Key or the O and cel Keys 163 Operation Level Section 5 3 164 Note Operation Level 20 0000 00 0000 o0 00 0000 20 0000 00 0000 oO 2 jm mj ta imal 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 20 0000 00 0000 00 0000 Process Value Process Value Set Point See note Auto Manual Switch Multi SP Set Point Setting Set Point During SP Ramp Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Current 1 Monitor Leakage Current 2 Monitor Program Start Soak Time Remain RUN STOP arm Value 1 arm Value Upper imit
112. of Square Root Parameter Section 4 17 Root Enable Extraction of square root 100 FS Lesbian a Extraction of square root low cut point 100 FS Argument 1 Input Data Extraction of Square 0 0 to 100 0 Root Low cut Point Operating Procedure Operation Level nitial Setting Level Input Type Extraction of Square Root Enable Extraction of Square Root Enable PV SP Adjustment Level Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 138 This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point parameter to 10 0 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the cel Key to select the Extraction of Square Root Enable param eter 3 Use the IA Key to select ON 4 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 5 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level 6 Select the Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point paramete
113. output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set ting of this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output is turned ON A Setting range Unit Defaut esd 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 Function E Related Parameters See Leakage current 1 monitor adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm HS alarm latch HS alarm hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 235 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be LER Leakage Current 2 Monitor ee eee a The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Function Monitor range Umt FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash Monitor E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays L L F7 Page 283 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs HSE HS Alarm 2 Alarm 1 must be assi
114. page 84 Setting Monitor Setting Items Pressing the PF Key in either the operation or adjustment level displays the applicable monitor setting items Press the PF Key to display in order Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 After Monitor Setting Item 5 has been displayed the dis play will switch to the top parameter in the operation level Note 1 Items set as disabled in the Monitor Setting Items 1 to 5 parameters will not be displayed and the display will skip to the next enabled setting 2 While a monitor setting item is being displayed the display will be switched to the top parameter in the operation level if the cel Key or the OJ Key is pressed Operating Procedure This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP and the Monitor Set ting Item 1 parameter to 7 Alarm Value 1 Operation Level Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation Input Type level to the initial setting level Move to Ad 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press vanced Function ing the cel Key Setting Level 142 Counting Control Output ON OFF Operations Section 4 20 Advanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization
115. parameters advanced function setting level The default is N a Close in Alarm e When open in alarm is set for the alarm 1 output the open in alarm sta tus is also applied to heater burnout HS alarm heater overcurrent and input error outputs Auxiliary output Auxiliary Indicators functions 1 to 3 output SUB1 to SUB3 Close in Alarm Lit Not lit Open in Alarm Lit Not lit e The alarm output will turn OFF i e the relay contacts will open when power is interrupted and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the setting of the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameter 3 6 Setting the Set Point SP Operation Level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON The process value PV is at the top of the display and the set point SP is at the bottom For Controllers that support a No 3 display E5AN E5EN the contents set in the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter advanced function setting level are displayed below the PV and SP The MV is displayed as the default For details refer to 3 11 Setting the No 3 Display 3 6 1 Changing the SP e The set point cannot be changed when the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 3 For details refer to 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level e To change the set point press the Al or Key in the Process Value Set Poin
116. set the parameter to 200 The default is 1300 6 Select the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter by pressing the Ice 7 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 50 The default is 200 Section 4 15 Key Key 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second 4 15 Using the Simple Program Function 4 15 1 Simple Program Function e The simple program function can be used for the following type of control SP gas cas aN cases pal aaa ee a a eee re hate Storey Wait band Set point pe ssss esees ose gt gt aan dee s Wait band i Soak time END display gt A RSET STRT i Select either STOP or RUN END output 129 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 e The program will start when the Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT END will be displayed on the No 2 display and the output assigned as the program end output will turn ON after the time set in the Soak Time parameter has expired in the wait band The Program Pattern parameter can be used to select moving to STOP mode or continuing operation in RUN mode after the program ends Parameters Related to the Simple Program Function Parameter name Symbol Set monitor values Display level Program Pattern PERN OFF STOP CONT Initial setting level Program Start RSET STRT Operation level Soak Time 1 to 9999 min o
117. set value can be saved by pressing the ce Key or it will go into effect after two seconds have elapsed Next set the hysteresis 61 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 Setting the Hysteresis Operating Procedure Set the hysteresis to 2 0 C Operation Level 1 Press the lO Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level 2 The Adjustment Level Display parameter will be displayed in the adjust Adjustment ment level Level Display 3 Select the Hysteresis Heating parameter by pressing the cel Key Hysteresis Heating 4 Press the IA and Keys to set the hysteresis 2 0 in this example Ei ther press the ce Key or wait for at least two seconds after setting the hys teresis value to confirm the setting 5 To return to the operation level press the OC Key 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 3 8 1 AT Auto tuning e When AT is executed the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically A method called the limit cycle method for forcibly changing the manipulated variable and fin
118. the same value as for 0 0 and the output for 100 0 to 105 0 will be the same value as for 100 0 Output current mA 20 MV 90 100 Transfer output Transfer output lower limit upper limit The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA Operating Procedure The following procedure sets the transfer output for an SP range of 50 to 200 Operation Level nitial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Input Type nitial Setting Level 2 Select the Transfer Output Type parameter by pressing the kel Key Transfer Output Type 128 Using the Simple Program Function nitial Setting Level Transfer Output Lower Limit 3 Press the IA Key to select 57 set point 4 Select the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter by pressing the ce 5 Use the Key to
119. twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the E5GN Cross sectional area of conductor AWG24 0 205 mm AWG14 2 081 mm Connect terminals 11 and 12 when using the E53 CN PHOIN2 as the external power supply for the ES1B Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 e Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the E53 CN PBN2 as the external power supply for the ES1B e Connect terminals 14 and 15 when using the ESAN EN PL N as the external power supply for the ES1B E53 CNULILIPHLIN2 E53 CNULIPBN2 E5AN EN LILIPLI N 11 14 gt 14 gt 2 lt gt 15 gt 15 The following table provides the specifications of the external power sup ply for ES1B Output voltage 12 VDC 10 Output current 20 mA max Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications 2 3 Using the Support Software Port Procedure 1 2 3 Use the communications port for Support Software to connect the personal computer to the Temperature Controller when using EST2 2C MV4 CX Thermo or a version of CX Thermo higher than 4 00 or other Support Soft ware The E5GN is supported from CX Thermo version 4 2 Th
120. type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 3 l During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Sening range Unt Default a Z00099 EU fo Function Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point as initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 3 type initial setting level Page 210 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level 173 Operation Level Section 5 3 AL IH Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 a inlet be papers rv a e alarm 1 type must not be 1 4 or AL iL Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 5 These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 1 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 1 e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal ene Point parameter setting Setting range Unt Defaut 0
121. when AT or ST is executed in RT mode Setting range Default oN RT function OFF oF F RT function ON aF F E Related Parameters AT execute cancel Page 179 Proportional band Integral time Derivative time Page 188 adjustment level PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HSU HS Alarm Use supported Alarm 1 must be assigned an e Set this parameter to use HS alarms Function A oN Enabled aFF Disabled sonoran Don woo Setting Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HSL HS Alarm Latch supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the HS alarm is held until any of the fol lowing conditions is satisfied a The HS alarm current is set to 50 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Setting range Default A aN Enabled af F Disabled Setting E Function E Related Parameters See HS alarm use advance
122. 0 K240F 120C 3 JPt100 11 9 10 T 21 K280F 140C 4 JPt100 123 13 14 U 22 K440F 220C 15 N 16 R 24 W 17 S 25 PL Il 18 B Oo o Y o y o y PSF Sai F g Pago B Pego Ee SY EEY a6 G4 Ope Eee pga Fob Bee b9AS pga Eee Boe b9AS oO pore o0 M 7 o gt m o s Peo Pro Ee 6 Fe 6 3E E Bee 930 Bas 93d Fas e988 gga Oend Bes 2984 3 dn 3 pn Brann 3a ranm Pil g Pi Bey B cnoi gga 4547 gga 4543 Baa bf i3 gga bA 13 go m mra m j m m m 7400 EC40g aga Z9hE BBs P9bE Y v oO mr oO E bL AS B OLAS Fae 3564 gga 35b i 1 g GE R FBS No 258 Parameter Structure Section 6 1 Conirollers with an Analog Input Advanced Function Setting Level gt Ci I 5 Agu Seo l O Moves automatically according to input type Currentinput Voltage input Re eget a ls e A J naaa Son ee epee Se eee J 0 4 to 20 mA 2 1to5V 4 0to 10V 1 O to 20 mA 3 0to5V Boom o I E Jy IM 5 H gn D b 3 3 Ev iu Boe CRER mi ELI cee bh ity p 3 Be f H ty I E m f en l 5 Ww i g Ev il gas 4677 gge SACO gga YAd9 j 4 E akr gga Na When calibration has been performed after purchase the user calibration information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving to the calibration level A dot is displayed 259 User Calibration Section 6 2
123. 07 ca g ALFA is 7 65 q B AL PAT Calculated Gain p At G e OB j FAL H AT Hysteresis za OB 2 BLIMA wango Mv mplitude Bes 20 0 fz EAE Input Digital Filter B LNF Oo E Py Ad Additional PV Dispi A Pi Hd Additional PV Display Bs oF F cal 2 5 dP wv Display RE Automatic Display Return Time Alarm 1 Latch E Alarm 2 Latch Alarm 3 Latch Time Input Error Output Cold Junction Compensation Method ro eS All S Ales Ello ooo o e a au rr a cn a B in PA MB Command Logic Switching PV Change Color PV Stable Band Alarm 1 ON Delay Alarm 2 ON Delay Alarm 3 ON Delay Alarm 1 OFF Delay Alarm 2 OFF Delay Alarm 3 OFF Delay Input Shift Type MV at Stop and Error Addition Auto Manual Select Addition Move to Protect Level Oo all Allo ry a a B o z z A Ig lug HH HS Alarm Use L HS Alarm Latch HS Alarm Hysteresis LBA Detection Time LBA Level L LBA Band Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment A
124. 1 4 or J Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 5 P pe pa m m These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 3 Type parameter initial setting level e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 3 l e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Sening range Unt Default O 09099 E0 fo Function Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point D Page 202 Alarm 3 type Page 210 initial setting level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hystere sis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level The MV Display parameter must be a MV Monitor Heating set to ON This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the heating con trol output during operation e This parameter cannot be set e During standard control the manipulated variable is monitored During Function heating cooling control the manipulated variables on the control output heating is monitored e The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed convoi Monitor range Umt Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Monitor Heating cooling 0 0 to
125. 1 Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 to 3 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Function m Setting See Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 must be assigned e Select one of the following four alarm 2 types Deviation deviation range absolute value or PV change rate alarm Refer to the alarm 1 type list The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting in that list cannot be used E Related Parameters Alarm value 2 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 2 Alarm value lower limit 2 Page 174 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level 209 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 ALE Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 must be assigned e Select one of the following four alarm 3 types Deviation deviation range absolute value or PV change rate alarm Function Refer to the alarm 1 type list The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting in that list cannot be used M Setting E Related Parameters See Alarm value 3 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 3 Alarm value lower limit 3 Page 175 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 3 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 3 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level z There must be a transfer output or a ER E Transfer Output Type cianboutput e This
126. 1 1 Shifting Inputs cc 06 ees eb a ds te as snes 89 4 1 2 How to Calculate Input Shift Values for a 2 point Shift 90 4 2 4 Alarm Hysteresis es acco 5 6538s pe BAD OE EASE See SR PEARLS E 93 4 2 1 Standby Sequence 0 0 eee eee 93 4 2 2 Alari Latch 3 ci oie ih pareus dine iw bee ra neta ie 94 4 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 94 4 3 1 Analog pute sc waco stint VR he bate bee es 94 4 4 Executing Heating Cooling Control 00 0000 0000 95 4 4 1 Heating Cooling Control 02 0 00000 eee eee ee 95 4 42 Seting S iad opine oa aga nian all panel dela wa E seamen 98 4 5 Using Event Inputs erste nieni i o eee eee eee 99 4 5 1 Event Input Settings 0 0 eee eee eee 99 4 5 2 How to Use the Multi SP Function 0 0 101 4 5 3 SCuiN 8S hens see sy eed BGG A ROP ERE EE REARS EER 102 4 5 4 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP 102 4 6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 104 4 6 1 Set Point Limiter cs oc ee cee eek eee bw a 104 4 6 2 SQN gu opie oleae eee eee Peake we allege anal AS 105 4 7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 106 4 7 1 SP Ramp sisis sags Vibe eh hoe ek a oes 106 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 0 108 4 9 Using the Key Protect Level 0 0 110 4 92 Protection iyen eke
127. 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Heater overcurrent hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 247 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported and alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON and the Heater Overcurrent Latch parameter must be set to OFF e This parameter sets the hysteresis for heater overcurrent detection Function Settingrange Um Deam R 0 4 t0 50 0 Setting E Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 pe PF Setting The PF Key must be supported Function a Setting ES5AN EN e This parameter sets the function of the PF Key The default is A M Set value OFF of F Setting Disabled Function Does not operate as a function key RUN FLIN RUN Specifies RUN status STOP Staf STOP Specifies STOP status R S 5 Reversing RUN STOP operation Specifies reversing RUN STOP opera tion status AT 2 AE 100 AT Execute Cancel Specifies reversing 100 AT Execute Cancel status See note 1 AT1 AE 40 AT Execute Cancel Specifi
128. 42 control output 1 37 control output 2 39 CT inputs 42 event inputs 41 external power supply for ES1B 44 inputs 36 power supply 35 precautions 33 terminal arrangement 31 terminals 31 Index 315 Index 316 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No H156 E1 07 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content January 2008 Original production March 2008 Page 9 Added case color information to the model number legend March 2009 Pages xii and xiv Added information on shipping standards and corrected mis takes Pages 26 96 236 246 255 263 and 277 Made minor corrections Pages 62 to 67 Made minor corrections to graphics Page 80 Replaced graphic and changed step 2 September 2009 Added the E5GN November 2010 Page 54 Added paragraph to section 3 5 Page 70 Changed description of a set value of 4 Page 127 Changed note 2 Page 270 Added a paragraph just before section 6 7 1 September 2013 Page 25 Added information on auxiliary output 2 of E5GN in Installation Page 33 Added information to the figure of ESGN in Terminal Arrangement Page 62 Added note for AT Auto tuning at bottom of page Page 68 Added note for Manual Setup at bottom of page Page 151 Add
129. 485 communi cations When 1 N RS 485 communications are used a maximum of 32 nodes including the host node can be connected An end node has not been set at each end of the communications line for RS 485 commu nications Set or connect terminating resistance at each end of the line If the E5CN E5AN E5EN or E5GN is the end node use 120 Q 1 2 W terminating resistance The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be at least 54 Q The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to the Controller Supply the specified power supply voltage The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to an Interface Converter such as the K3SC Supply the specified power supply voltage The same baud rate and communications method are not being used by all of the Con trollers host devices and other devices on the same communications line Set the same values for the baud rate protocol data length stop bits and parity on all nodes The unit number specified in the command frame is different from the unit number set by the Controller Use the same unit number The same unit number as the Controller is being used for another node on the same communications line for RS 485 communica tions Set each unit number for only one node There is a mistake in programming the host device Use a line monitor to check the commands Check operation using a sam ple prog
130. 5 See note 5 WRE Work bit 6 See note 5 WR7 Work bit 7 See note 5 WR8 Work bit 8 See note 5 When control output 1 is a current output See note 2 NONE No assignment O Control output heat ing C O Control output cool ing Control Output 2 z NONE No assignment Assignment O Control output heat ing C O Control output cool ing ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 P END Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 WR1 Work bit 1 See note 5 WR2 Work bit 2 See note 5 WR3 Work bit 3 See note 5 WR4 Work bit 4 See note 5 WRS5 Work bit 5 See note 5 WRE6 Work bit 6 See note 5 WR7 Work bit 7 See note 5 WR8 Work bit 8 See note 5 296 Parameters Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Characters Sub Setting monitor value NONE No assignment O Control output heat ing Control output cool ing Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 P END Program end output See note 3 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 4 WR1 Work bit 1 See note 5 WR2 Work bit 2 See note 5 WR3 Work bit 3 See note 5 WR4 Work bit 4 See note 5 WRS5 Work bit 5 See note 5 WRE Work bit 6 See note 5 WR7 Work bit 7 See note 5 WR8 Work bit 8 See note 5 C O ALM1 Display Default Appendix Set value Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Same
131. 5 to 165 C 0 to 165 C 0 to 320 F 140 to 260 C 0 to 260 C 0 to 500 F Analog input 0 to 50 mV Either of the following ranges by scaling 1 999 to 9 999 199 9 to 999 9 Thermocouple Input type Current input 0 to 2 300 C 0 to 3 200 F The default is 5 0 to 1 300 C 0 to 2 300 F e If a platinum resistance thermometer is mistakenly connected while a set ting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in effect S ERR will be displayed To clear the S ERR display check the wiring and then turn the power OFF and back ON Make sure that the setting of the input type parameter agrees with the sensor that is connected Specifications 4 to 20 mA Set value 0 to 20 mA Input temperature setting range Either of the following ranges by scaling 1 999 to 9 999 Voltage input 1to5V Oto5V Oto 10V The default is 0 199 9 to 999 9 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 53 Selecting the Temperature Unit 3 3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 3 3 1 Temperature Unit Section 3 3 e Either C or F can be selected as the temperature unit e Set the temperature unit in the Temperature Unit parameter of the initial setting level The default is C Operating Procedure The following example shows how to select C as the temperature unit Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at
132. 5CN U 2 Insert the E5CN E5CN U into the mounting hole in the panel 3 Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel and temporarily fasten the ESCN E5CN U 25 Installation Section 2 1 4 Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 29 to 0 39 N m Mounting the Terminal Cover For the E5CN make sure that the UP mark is facing up and then attach the E53 COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Temper ature Controller E5AN EN Mounting Mounting Bracket Panel Bracket a gr g i z l I L bb Terminal Cover E53 COV16 Terminal Cover Waterproof packing E53 COV16 Waterproof packing E5AN E5EN Mounting to the Panel 1 2 3 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function 2 Insert the E5SAN E5EN into the square mounting hole in the panel thick ness 1 to 8 mm Attach the Mounting Brackets provided with the product to the mounting grooves on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case 3
133. 5EN and E5EN H comply with Lloyd s standards When applying the standards the following installation and wiring requirements must be met in the application E Application Conditions 1 Installation Location The E5CN E5CN H E5AN E5AN H E5EN and E5EN H comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd s standards Therefore they must be installed in a location equipped with air condition ing They must therefore be installed in a location equipped with air conditioning They cannot be used on the bridge or decks or in a location subject to strong vibration 2 Wiring Conditions Install the recommended ferrite core and wrap the line around it three turns for the applicable lines e g power supply cable line and signal lines of the models listed in the following table See illustra tions Install the ferrite cores as close to the terminal block of the E5UIN as possible As a guideline the ferrite core should be within 10 cm of the terminal block Lines Requiring Ferrite Cores Model Signal and power lines provided with ferrite cores E5CN E5CN U or ESCN H _ Input power supply E5EN E5AN E5EN H or Input power supply and I O lines control outputs 1 and 2 communications E5AN H event inputs 1 to 4 transfer output and external power supply Advanced Type models do not have an external power supply Recommended Ferrite Core Manufacturer Seiwa Electric Mfg Co Ltd Model E04RA310190100
134. 9 to 9999 numeric range with decimal point omitted e The default is 5 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 for Controllers with Analog Inputs e The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS 1602 1995 IEC 584 1 L U W JPt100 Pt100 PLII Control Range Fe CuNi DIN 43710 1985 Cu CuNi DIN 43710 1985 W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC 751 According to Platinel II Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp e Resistance thermometer and thermocouple input Temperature lower limit 20 C to temperature upper limit 20 C or temperature lower limit 40 F to temperature upper limit 40 F e ES1B input Same as input indication range e Analog input 5 to 105 of scaling range 304 Appendix Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level you must enter passwords Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level Start in manual mode Start in automatic mode Operation Level PF Key See note 5 Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1 s See note 4 Press th
135. A band within the LBA detection time the loop burnout alarm will turn ON If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 i e the set point is approached and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less than the LBA band the loop burnout alarm will turn ON e If the LBA detection time LBA level LBA detection band and PID set tings are not appropriate alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary e Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease e If a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera ture the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level preventing detection of the loop burnout Loop Burnout Alarm Section 4 12 e If the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat urated manipulated variable a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected e Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in tem perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature e g an SSR short circuit fault e Detection is not pos
136. AT e The MV is forcibly increased and decreased around the set point to find l the characteristics of the control object From the results the PID con stants are automatically set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters e Both 100 AT and 40 AT are supported for AT e Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control e This parameter will not be displayed when either 100 or 40 AT exe cute cancel is set to be executed using an event input Function O OFF AT Cancel OFF Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute AT 1 40 AT Execute e This parameter is normally aF F Press the A Key and select At 7 or AE i to execute AT AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or during ON OFF control e When AT execution ends the parameter setting automatically returns to nFF E Related Parameters See Proportional band Integral time Derivative time adjustment level Page 188 PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 179 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Communications must be supported P iti The Event Input Assignments 1 and MWE Communications Writing 2 Baar MUF a be set to enable communications writing e This parameter enables disables writing of parameters to the E5CN from l the host personal computer using communications e This parameter is not displayed if communications write enable disable is Functi uneton
137. Alarm Set Value 0 to 9999 100 times ON OFF Counter Reset 0 Disable the counter reset function 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter None Move to Calibration Level 1999 to 9 999 Extended Function The Digital Control ler must be manufac tured in April 2015 or later version 6 1 or higher Note 0 to 8 191 1 Set None as the unit for analog inputs 23 0 to 50 mV 2 eee range depends on whether control output 1 is a current output or voltage output for driv ing SSR 3 PEND program end output can be set even when the program pattern is set to OFF but the func tion will be disabled 4 Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON OFF count alarm is ON 5 Displayed when logic operations are used For detail refer to 4 22 Logic Operations Protect Level Parameters Move to Protect level Characters Prav Setting monitor value 1999 to 9 999 Display Default Set value Operation Adjustment Protect GAPE 0to3 Initial Setting Communica 0to2 tions Protect Setting Change Protect PF Key Protect Parameter Mask Enable Password to Move to Protect Level OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1999 to 9 999 Default Set value Compo Way F SYSWAY 0 to 99 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 9 6 or 57 6 Parameters Protocol
138. Auto Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the Ice Key Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 6 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to ON nitial Setting Level 7 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the advanced Input Type function setting level to the initial setting level 8 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Operation Level 9 Select the Auto Manual Switch parameter by pressing the cel Key i Auto Manual H M Switch Manual Control Level 10 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the manual control level 11 Press the lA or Key to set the manual MV In this example the MV is set to 50 0 Note The manual MV setting must be saved see page 18 but values changed with Key operations are reflected in the control output immediately 12 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the manual control
139. Control Switching between Auto and Manual Control Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation Section 4 5 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assign ment parameter STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual Switch PRST Program Start DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Exe cute Cancel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable or LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied Event input ON OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer However inputs of 250 ms or longer is determined using logic operations The functions are described in detail below Event inputs 1 and 2 are taken as examples When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to STOP RUN STOP control is started when event input 1 or 2 turns OFF Control is stopped when the input turns ON Alarm outputs however will be according to the process value The STOP indicator will light while control is stopped Event input 1 or 2 ON Event input
140. Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during autotuning Parameter name Setting range Default AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 0 8 AT Hysteresis Universal input C or F 0 8 See note 0 1 to 999 9 Analog input FS 0 01 to 9 99 Limit Cycle MV 5 0 to 50 0 Amplitude Note When the temperature unit is F the default is 1 4 E Related Parameters AT execute cancel adjustment level Page 179 225 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 LNF Input Digital Filter e This parameter sets the time constant for the input digital filter The follow ing diagram shows the effect on data after passing through the digital fil 4 ter Function PV before passing through filter A a ert y PV after passing through filter 0 63 A Time nail constant Time Input digital filter A Setting range Unit Default foot9e9 Second 00 Setting v Ad Additional PV Display This parameter adds a display at the beginning of the operation level for the process value PV If there is no need to display the set point use this to dis play only the present temperature Funcion Set to ON to display and OFF to not display Setting ranges J Doa A aN Displayed af F Not displayed GFF Setting Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 oa dP MV Display This parameter is used to display the manipulated varia
141. E5AN EN Section 2 1 Tool insertion hole y N H L F N L haha oo oooh E5EN Flat blade screwdriver Unit mm o4 50 1 2 3 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks 2 Insert the flat blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case two on the top and two on the bottom and use it to pry and pull out the front panel slightly Then pull out on the front panel gripping both sides Be sure not to impose excessive force on the panel Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Four gaps two on the top and two on the bottom Four gaps two on the top and two on the bottom I OODOOGGR0 D WE N Top View of E5AN Top View of E5EN 29 Installation Section 2 1 3 When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other make sure that the sealing rubber is in place and press the E5AN EN toward the rear case until it snaps into position While pressing the E5AN EN into place press down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks securely lock in place Make sure that electronic components do not come into con tact with the ca
142. E5GN The exposed conductor length inserted into the terminal for wires or fer rules must be 6 mm Ferrules must be 0 8 to 1 5 mm in diameter 34 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 E E 3 iQ E 2 32 ee A o 6 mm 6 mm Ferrules Wires Recommended Ferrules for SUB2 on ESGN Manufacturer Model number Phoenix Contact Al 0 25 6 BU Al 0 34 6 TQ AIl 0 5 6 WH Al 0 75 6 GY Al 1 6 RD Note Do not remove the terminal block from the E5AN E5EN or E5CN Doing so may cause product malfunction or incorrect operation 2 2 3 Wiring In the connection diagrams the left side of the terminal numbers represents the inside of the Controller and the right side represents the outside Power supply e With the E5CN connect to terminals 9 and 10 with the E5CN U connect to pins 10 and 11 with the E5AN E5EN and E5GN connect pins 1 and 2 The following table shows the specifications Input power supply E5CN U E5AN EN 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VDC no polarity e These models have reinforced insulation between the input power supply the relay outputs and other terminals 35 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Input e Make the connections according to the input type as shown below using terminals 3 to 5 for the E5CN pins 1 to 3 for the ES5CN U pins 18 to 20 for the E5AN or E5EN and pins 10 to 12 for the ESGN 3 genT 3 3 i A ae vo r A E a ee y
143. F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F CO NN O1j BR V P H oO 20 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 750 0 F o 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F oO 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F i 200 to 600 C 300 to 1 100 F ine 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F wo 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F _ A 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F lt i ol 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F O 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F i N 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F B 100 to 1 800 C 300 to 3 200 F Infrared Tempera ture Sensor ES1B 10 to 70 C 0 to 90 C 0 to 190 F 60 to 120 C 0 to 120 C 0 to 240 F 115 to 165 C 0 to 165 C 0 to 320 F 140 to 260 C 0 to 260 C 0 to 500 F Analog input 0 to 50 mV One of the following ranges depending on the scal ing 1 999 to 9 999 199 9 to 999 9 Thermocouple Input type Current input 0 to 2 300 C 0 to 3 200 F Specifications 4to 20 mA Set value 0 to 20 mA 0 to 1 300 C 0 to 2 300 F Input temperature range One of the following ranges depending on the scal ing 1 999 to 9 999 Voltage input 1to5V Oto5V 0to10V E Related Parameters 199 9 to 999 9 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999
144. FF Delay Times When an input with OFF delay turns OFF the output will turn OFF after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is 0 to 9 999 The default is 0 disabled Switching ON OFF Delay Time Unit Select either seconds or minutes for the ON OFF delay time unit The de fault is seconds Selecting the Number of Multi SP Uses Select the number of Multi SP uses from 0 to 2 Changing Event Input Data Logic Operations Operating Procedure Section 4 22 Select the event input conditions from the following setting ranges Parameter name Setting range 0 Not assigned 1 Event input 1 external input 2 Event input 2 external input 3 Event input 3 external input 4 Event input 4 external input 5 6 7 8 Event Input Data 1 Work bit 1 Work bit 2 Work bit 3 Work bit 4 9 Work bit 5 10 Work bit 6 11 Work bit 7 12 Work bit 8 Event Input Data 2 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 3 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 4 Same as for event input data 1 Note The event input data can be changed from the default setting even if there is no event input terminal external input By changing the default setting the event input assignment parameters will be dis played at the Controller display and can be set from the Controller 12 Changing the Event Input Assignment Function Select the setting for the event input assignment When a work bit is selected as eve
145. Inputs 19 99 to 99 99 FS Setting Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 189 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 The control must be standard control and 2 PID control oF R Manual Reset Value The Integral Time parameter must be set to 0 e This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset l during stabilization of P or PD control A Setting range Unt 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 E Related Parameters See Integral time adjustment level Page 188 PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 H95 Hysteresis Heating The control must be ON OFF control For the Hysteresis Cooling parame CHY5 Hysteresis Cooling is ne must be heating cool This parameter sets the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at the ON OFF switching point e For standard control use the Hysteresis Heating parameter The Hyster esis Cooling parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control the hysteresis can be set independently for 4 FEDOR heating cooling The Hysteresis Heating parameter is used for the heat ing side and the Hysteresis Cooling parameter is used for the cooling side A Parameter Setting range Default name Setting Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Heating Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 FS Hysteresis Controllers with
146. N To move from the operation level to the manual control level press the LOI Key for at least three seconds with the Auto Manual Switch parameter displayed In addition this operation can be performed using the PF Key by setting the PF Key parameter advanced function setting level to A M Auto Manual For details on the setting method refer to 4 13 Performing Manual Control This setting cannot be made during ON OFF operation The MANU indicator will light during manual control e It is not possible to move to any displays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation e To return to the operation level press the O Key or the PF Key in the manual control level for at least one second PV MV Manual MV as The manual control level display appears as shown below With No 3 Display Without No 3 Display i St IC EME JE or Function s cI CI C JIT 2 a mE mn of n mM LIL uu 22 h cnn con ong Clon Cat 3u SLL po PV Manual MV PV SP Manual MV PV Manual MV Note When the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter is 0 Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature According to indication range for each sensor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit 197 Manual Control Level Section 5 6 Ss attingrange MV manual MV Sta
147. N xi Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure malfunction or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events Use the product within the specifications 1 The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations Do not use or store the product in any of the following locations e Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment e Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere e Places subject to direct sunlight e Places subject to dust or corrosive gas in particular sulfide gas and ammonia gas e Places subject to intense temperature change e Places subject to icing and condensation e Places subject to vibration and large shocks 2 Use and store the Digital Temperature Controller within the rated ambient temperature and humidity Gang mounting two or more temperature controllers or mounting temperature controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the temperature controllers which will shorten their service life In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers 3 To allow heat to escape do not block the area around the product Do not block the ventilation holes on the product 4 Be sure to wire properly with correct po
148. No function is assigned to auxiliary output 3 Heating control output is output Cooling control output is output See note 1 Alarm 1 is output Alarm 2 is output Alarm 3 is output Program end is output See note 2 Control output ON Off count alarm Work bit 1 See note 4 Work bit 2 See note 4 Work bit 3 See note 4 a a Work bit 4 See note 4 s s a un Work bit 6 See note 4 a lt a Work bit 7 See note 4 Work bit 5 See note 4 oo Work bit 8 See note 4 Default ALMI See note 3 1 If o is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control when there is no control output 2 E5AN EN control automatical ly switches to a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 CSEL Character Select e This parameter switches the characters to be displayed The following two types of characters can be displayed 11 segment displ
149. OFF PF Key enabled ON PF Key disabled Operation as a function key is prohibited Setting The shaded cell indicates the default This parameter is displayed only PMSK Parameter Mask Enable when a parameter mask has been set from the Setup Tool e This parameter turns the parameter mask function ON and OFF gt Function Seting range Detaut C aN Enabled aFF Disabled jon oo Setting Note A parameter mask can be used to hide the displays of parameters that are not needed The parameter mask function is provided by the Setup Tool Setup Tool CX Thermo EST2 2C MV4 161 Protect Level Section 5 2 PRLP Password to Move to Protect Level This parameter is used to set the password to move to the protect level i e To prevent setting the password incorrectly the IA and O Keys or gt and O Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password Function Setting range Defaut Q 1999 to 9999 oo Setting e Set this parameter to 0 when no password is to be set E Related Parameters See Move to protect level protect level Page 160 Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representa tive Operation Level Section 5 3 5 3 Operation Level Display this level to perform control operations on the E5UIN You can set alarm values
150. P Auto Manual Switch Function Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel Setting Change Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel e Default Event Input Assignment 1 NANE Event Input Assignment 2 tar a NoNE None Skaf RUN STOP Setting MANU Auto Manual PRSE Program start See note 1 dRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 Setting Change Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel Note 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled E Related Parameter See SPO to SP3 adjustment level Page 186 a Number of multi SP uses initial setting level Page 213 SER Extraction of Square Root Enable An analog input must be supported gt Function CL Setting 216 This parameter enables and disables square root extraction Setting range Derat aN Enabled 5F F Disabled Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 E Related Parameter See Extraction of square root low cut point adjustment level Page 194 Mri The Initial Setting Communications AMol Move to Advanced Function Setting Level p tect parame must ba sci 10 0 Set the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter set value to 169 e Move to
151. PPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT S IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYS TEM Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not consti tute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construc tion changes are made However some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please con sult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifica tions of purchased Product Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for cler
152. See note 6 Absolute value lower limit le Xoo A standby sequence is added to with standby sequence 4 the absolute value lower limit alarm 9 See note 6 LBA alarm 1 type only Refer to page 118 See note 7 PV change rate alarm Refer to page 72 See note 8 SP 0 207 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Note 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON _ H lt 0 L lt 0 LH SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 E Loo IHI lt L HI gt ILI H LSP IHI gt IL H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IH lt ILI 3 Set value 4 Lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF n H lt 0 L lt 0 L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 a es H lt 0 L gt 0 IH lt IL JH gt IL H LSP IH 2 IL H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IHI lt ILI 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence For the lower limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is normal ly OFF if upper and lower limit hysteresis overlaps In case 3 the alarm is always OFF 5 Set value 5 The alarm is always OFF if upper and lower limit alarm hys teresis with standby sequence overlaps 6 Refer to 4 2 1 Standby Sequence for information on the operation of the standby sequence 7 Refer to 4 12 1 Lo
153. Setting Setting monitor value Display CompoWay F SYSWAY Modbus See note Communications Unit No Communications Baud Rate Communications Data Length Communications Stop Bits 299 Appendix Setting monitor value Display Default Unit Setvalue Communications Parity 4 None Even Odd NONE EVEN odd Send Data Wait Time Note When setting CWF either CompoWay F or SYSWAY can be used as the communications protocol CompoWay F and SYSWAY are automatically identified by the command frames Initialization According to Parameter Changes The parameters that are initialized when parameters are changed are shown under Related initialized parame ters Changed Scaling Pro Trans parameter Lower gram _ fer Out Related initial Limit Pattern put ized parame Scaling Type ters Upper Limit Related param Analog eter initializa input tion execution condition SP Upper Limit See SP Lower Limit Note 1 Set Point See note 2 SPO to SP3 See note 2 RT See note 3 Proportional See Band See note note 3 10 Integral Time See See note 10 note 3 Derivative Time See See note 10 note 3 MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit MV at Stop MV at PV Error Manual MV Transfer Output See See See See Upper Limit note 4 note 4 note 4 note 4 Transfer Output 1 1 1 2 Lower
154. Software A Il for supper Sotwarg ILI l I L o ime a Bottom view of E5EN Setup Tool port E5GN Je nl C SS GSS eas J i 3 i A i a rd Nn 0 e y een H g Hih ilo U s em aF am TI coo Side View of the E5GN Note Hold the connector when inserting or disconnecting the Cable 3 Install the driver Install the driver to enable the Cable to be used with the personal comput er Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer the OS detects the product as a new device At this time install the driver using the instal lation wizard For details on installation methods refer to the users man ual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable 4 Setting Setup Tool Communications Conditions Set the communications port COM port number to be used for the CX Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable Refer to the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable Instruction Manual 46 Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 and Setup Manual for details on how to check the COM port assigned to the USB Serial Conversion Cable The communications conditions for Setup Tool COM ports are fixed as shown in the table
155. THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PROD UCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intel lectual property right Omron s sole obligation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamination abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before ship ment Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or elec tronic components circuits system assemblies or any other materials or sub stances or environments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty Se
156. Thermocouple Resistance 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Cooling Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 0 99 99 FS Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 190 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 adm IT The Program Pattern parameter Sofi Soak Time must not be set to OFF e This parameter sets the time for the control operation when using the sim l ple program function Function Sening range Unt Default a Setting E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 4 Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 niL The Program Pattern parameter WE b Wait Band must not be set to OFF e This parameter sets the stable band within which the soak time is mea l sured for the simple program function Function Setting range Unt Defaut Controllers with Thermocouple Resis OFF or 0 1 to C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs 999 9 See note Setting Controllers with Analog Inputs OFF or 0 01 to FS 99 99 Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 Ta Soak time adjustment level
157. Units 3 5 ne e mea X E amp E5EN Group Mounting Individual Mounting 48 x number of Units 2 5 120 min 24 Installation Section 2 1 E5GN Individual Mounting Group Mounting 48 x number of units 2 5 0 6 o f 1 0 0 0 3 22 2 5 40 min e Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers e The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm for the E5CN E5CN U and E5GN and 1 to 8 mm for E5AN and E5EN e Units must not be closely mounted vertically Observe the recommended mounting space limits e When group mounting several Controllers ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications e When group mounting Controllers that have auxiliary output 2 it will not be possible to tighten the wiring screws for auxiliary output 2 after the Controllers are mounted 2 1 3 Mounting E5CN CN U E53 COV17 Terminal Cover Waterproof packing Pane E5CN E5CN U For the Wiring Socket for the ESCN U order the P2CF 11 or P3GA 11 sepa rately Mounting to the Panel 1 2 3 1 For waterproof mounting waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function There is no waterproof packing included with the E
158. Y Communications 0 to 99 1 Unit No Communications 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 Baud Rate 38 4 57 6 Communications 7 8 Data Length Communications 7 1 2 Stop Bits Communications None Even Odd Parity Send Data Wait 0 to 99 Time 19 Insulation Block Diagrams Section 1 5 1 5 Insulation Block Diagrams The insulation block diagrams for the E5CN E5AN E5EN and E5GN are pro vided in this section E5CN Input CT input Q outputs outputs 1 and 2 Communications and events External power supply C output Power supply x Reinforced insulation Functional insulation E5CN U Input and Q output output 1 C output Power supply R output Y output Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 Reinforced insulation Functional insulation ES5AN EN Input CT input and Q output output 1 Communications and events External power supply and Q output output 2 C output and transfer output supply O Reinforced insulation Functional insulation E5GN Input CT input Q output output 1 Communications and events C output suppl ee R output Auxiliary output 1 Auxiliary output 2 Reinforced insulation Functional insulation 20 SECTION 2 Preparations This section describes the work required to prepare the ESCN ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers for operation including installation and wiring 2 1 Installations coenen eee a
159. able 216 extraction of square root low cut point 194 HB ON OFF 222 heater burnout detection 1 181 heater burnout detection 2 183 heater burnout hysteresis 223 heater burnout latch 223 heater current 1 value monitor 168 180 heater current 2 value monitor 169 182 heater overcurrent detection 1 181 heater overcurrent detection 2 183 heater overcurrent hysteresis 247 heater overcurrent latch 246 heater overcurrent use 246 HS alarm 1 184 HS alarm 2 185 HS alarm hysteresis 236 HS alarm latch 235 HS alarm use 235 hysteresis cooling 190 hysteresis heating 190 initial setting communications protect 160 input digital filter 226 input error output 228 input shift type 233 input type 200 integral time 188 LBA band 237 LBA detection time 236 LBA level 237 leakage current 1 monitor 170 184 leakage current 2 monitor 170 185 limit cycle MV amplitude 225 linear current output 212 lower limit temperature input shift value 187 manual MV limit enable 244 manual reset value 190 MB command logic switching 229 monitor setting item 248 monitor setting item display 1 to 5 196 move to advanced function setting level 217 move to calibration level 254 move to protect level 160 move to protect level time 228 multi SP set point setting 167 multi SP uses 220 MV manual MV 197 MV at PV error 192 MV at stop 192 MV at stop and error addition 233 MV change rate lim
160. age 200 v SE PV Status Display Function e The PV in the No 1 display for the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Screen is Lo alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the PV status display function Function E Monitor range Default aF F No PV status display MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Monitor StaP STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped ALM i ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status AL Me ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status ALM ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status I M ALM ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is ON E Related Parameters See Process value set point PV operation level Page 165 PV MV manual MV manual control level Page 197 250 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 SY SE r Function m Monitor See SV Status Display Function e The SP Blank or Manual MV in the No 2 display for the PV SP PV or PV Manual MV Screen is alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function Monitor range Default aF F No SV status display MONDI MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control S aP STOP is alte
161. al Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved 12 A switch or circuit breaker should be provided close to this unit The switch or circuit breaker should be within easy reach of the operator and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit 13 Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the body of the E5CN E5AN or E5EN from the case and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components When inserting the interior of the product do not allow the electronic components to touch the case Always turn OFF the power supply before removing the terminal block from the E5GN and never touch nor apply shock to the terminals or electronic components 14 Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade alcohol 15 Design system control panel etc considering the 2 second of delay that the controller s output to be set after power ON 16 The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels Take this into consideration when performing control 17 The number of EEPROM write operations is limited Therefore use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data during communications or other operations 18 Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Digital Temperature Controller to discharge static electri
162. al setting level communications setting level advanced function setting level and calibration level can be used only when control is stopped Control outputs are stopped when any of these four levels is selected 4 When the PF Setting is set to A M in models with a PF Key E5AN EN 5 When the PF Setting is set to PFDP in models with a PF Key E5AN EN Protect Level e To switch to the protect level from the operation level the adjustment level or the monitor setting item level simultaneously hold down the O and cel Keys for at least 3 seconds See note This level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of parameters Protected levels will not be displayed and so the parameters in that level cannot be modified Note The key pressing time can be changed in Move to Protect Level pa rameter advanced function setting level Operation Level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON You can move to the protect level initial setting level or adjustment level from this level Normally select this level during operation While operation is in progress items such as the PV and manipulated variable MV can be monitored and the set points alarm values and alarm upper and lower limits can be monitored and changed Adjustment Level To move to the adjustment level press the O Key once for less than 1 s This level is for entering set values and offset values for contr
163. an be carried out 3 The E53 CNOOPON2 for E5CN E5AN OOPO N or E5EN OOPO N has a built in external power supply for ES1B Infrared Temperature Sen sors These E5CN models can be used as the power supply when using ES1B When ES1B are used with other E5CN models provide a separate power supply for the Infrared Temperature Sensors Shifting Input Values Section 4 1 C Control target Infrared Temperature Pa eset Sensor ge wee B Thermometer Figure 1 Offset Configuration for an Infrared Temperature Sensor Method for a 1 point Shift 1 2 3 1 Inthe configuration shown in Figure 1 bring the set point to near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled Assume that the control target temperature C and the thermometer temperature B are the same IE L1 Upper limit 2 Check the thermometer temperature B and the Controller readout A L i 14 Temperature Subtract the Controller readout temperature A from the thermometer o Inn A temperature B and set INSL and NSH to the result as the input shift val ue The shift is illustrated in Figure 2 Sra 3 After setting the input shift values check the Controller readout A and the Input Shift thermometer temperature B If they are almost the same this completes Value shifting the temperature input
164. an be dis Can be dis played Can be dis played and changed Cannot be Can be dis played Can be dis played PV SP Others Cannot be played and changed played and changed displayed and moving to other levels is not possible displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Can be dis played and changed Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Adjustment level e Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to 0 The default is 0 Initial Setting Communications Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels is not possible This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level communica tions setting level and advanced function setting level Protect Initial setting level Communications Advanced function setting level setting level 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach 1 Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach The default is 1 This protect level restricts key operations Setting Change Protect IIL Settings can be changed using key operations WZ settings however can be changed
165. and 191 part names 2 password 111 112 PID constants 62 65 setting manually 68 PID control setting 61 PID ON OFF Page 193 platinum resistance thermometer 271 calibration 264 power supply wiring 35 precautions wiring 33 process value PV 165 program end 132 output 132 program patterns 130 proportional action 69 proportional band 68 protect level 16 110 159 moving to 112 160 228 communications operation command 112 password 111 162 parameter operation list 299 protection 110 initial setting communications 110 160 operation adjustment 110 160 setting change 110 111 PV display color change 113 stable band 114 PV MV 197 313 314 R ratings 275 removing from case ESAN ESEN 29 ESCN 28 removing the terminal block ESGN 30 reverse operation 55 206 RT robust tuning 66 234 run stop control 103 S scaling upper and lower limits for analog inputs 94 screwless clamp terminals 34 self tuning ST 64 205 sensor input control range 303 indication range 303 setting range 303 sensor types 200 set point SP 59 limiter 104 limiting change rate 106 lower limit 106 ramp 106 setting 59 61 setting upper and lower limits 104 switching between SPs 102 upper limit 105 setting change protect 110 setting level configuration 15 setting levels diagram 305 settings cooling coefficient 98 dead band 98 event input 99 HB alarm he
166. and Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter in the advanced function setting level e The default is FEd red The following table shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function i Function Setting Function PV change color Application example L Constant Constant Orange To match the display color with other Controller models Setting Constant Red To match the display color with other Controller models Constant Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to alarm 1 ALM1 ON ALM1 ON Application example Red to Red To display the PV reached Green signal Green to Green To display error signals Red 230 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Linked to PV stable band Setting Function PV change color Application example Within Within PV stable PV stable band band Within i High ip py A SP PV stable band High Application example Red to Green Red To display stable status Green to Red Green to Orange Red To display stable status Orange to Red Orange to Green To display stable status Green to Red E Related Parameters See PV stable band advanced function setting level Page 231 PY b PV Stable Band m Function a Setting See This parameter sets the PV stable band width within which the PV di
167. ange Set point limiter Setting range y v gt Set point Upper limit value changed A B i x Cannot be set Upper limit value changed y Set point A i ee i Input type changed y x y gt Set point A Set value Y Upper lower limit values B V Sensor upper lower limit values O Can be set Symbol Parameter level Parameters Set Point Upper Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting Set Point Lower Limit Initial setting level To limit the SP setting 4 6 2 Setting Set the set point upper and lower limits in the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level In this example it is assumed that the input type is set to a K thermocouple with a temperature range of 200 to 1300 C 200 1300 Input setting range Set point limiter 100 1000 Setting the Set Point Upper limit Value Operating Procedure Set Point Upper Limit 1000 Input Type 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Set Point 2 Select the Set Point Upper Limit parameter H Upper limit 105 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Section 4 7 3 Use the Al and Keys to set the parameter to 1000
168. anged parameter and the output type setting 301 Appendix 302 SP SP upper and lower limits Ramp SP SP upper and lower limits PV Input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits MV Heating 100 0 0 0 MV Cooling 100 0 0 0 4 1 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to SP Ramp SP or PV 4 2 Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to MV Heating or MV Cooling 4 3 Initialized to the above default values regardless of the settings for changing the transfer out put type 5 Initialized as follows according to the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter setting MV Upper Limit 105 0 MV Lower Limit Standard 5 0 heating cooling 105 0 6 Initialized to control output cooling for heating and cooling control according to the following The defaults for standard control are the defaults in the parameter list With control output 2 The Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling Without control output 2 and ESAN EN The Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling Without control output 2 and E5CN The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling E5GN The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output cooling 7 When the program pattern is OFF the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to
169. arameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed Select the Heater Burnout Detection parameter by pressing the kel Key Check that this parameter is set to ON the default Next set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter Setting Heater Burnout Detection PV SP Adjustment Level Display Heater Current 7 1 Value Monitor Heater Burnout 8 Detection 1 5 Adjustment Level 6 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O key again for at least one second to move to the operation level Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter by pressing the ke Key Check the current value Next set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter Select the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter by pressing the ce Key Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 on when mak ing the settings Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 9 For this example set 2 5 To return to the operation level press the O Hbl
170. arameters in the protect level will be enabled immediately 112 PV Change Color Section 4 10 4 10 PV Change Color 4 10 1 PV Color Change Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display No 1 display There are three display colors orange red and green and you can select from the following three modes and eight functions M O PV Change e Constant This mode displays orange red or green all the time L ALI Color e Linked to Alarm 1 This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON e Linked to PV stable band This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter advanced func tion setting level e The default is FEd red The following tables shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function Setting Function PV change color Application example Constant Constant Orange To match the display color with other Controller models Constant Red To match the display color with other Controller models Constant Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to Alarm alarm 1 value ALM1 lit A SP ALM1 not lit ALM 1 lit Ap
171. arm 1 See note Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 See note Control output coo Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment 3 ing See note 3 Example E5GN Parameter name Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 Control output Control output Assignment heating heating Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 See note Control output coo Assignment 2 ing Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Note 1 No parameter assignment is displayed because there is no control output 2 2 The output set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program END output unless the program pattern is OFF 3 For the ESAN EN the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set for control output cooling the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set for alarm 2 e The heating cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct Reverse Operation parameter is set to direct e When DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation is assigned for an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 control will start with the contents set for the Direct Reverse Operation parameter inverted when the event input turns ON and with the contents left according to the setting when the event input turns OFF For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct Reverse Operation parameter refer to Control by Inverting Direct Reverse Operation on page 103 e When heating cooling control is selected
172. ary output 1 If the alarm 1 function is to be used for HB alarm only set the alarm 1 type to 0 i e do not use alarm 1 function The following diagrams show the internal equalizing circuits for auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 z l ee T SUB1 Osha SUB2 si Ai E5CN E5CN U cy SYB3 SUB1 SUB2 i Q __ i SUB1 0 Terminal 14 is on the bottom E5AN EN E5GN ALM1 2 3 can be output to auxiliary output 1 2 3 or changed with the advanced function setting level e The relay specifications are as follows E5CN AN EN SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A E5GN SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A Event Inputs e The E5UIN B supports event inputs When event inputs 1 2 are to be used connect to terminals 11 to 13 or terminals 7 to 9 When event inputs 3 4 are to be used connect to terminals 23 to 25 Eb BF ie E53 E53 CNUIBCIN2 in the N2 in the E53 AKBinthe AKB in the ESGN CULB OOB E5CN l M 500 ES5AN EN LIMLJ 500 N for ESCN for ESAN EN Use event inputs under the following conditions The outflow current is approximately 7 mA Contact input ON 1 KQ max OFF 100 kQ min No contact input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current
173. as for control output 1 None Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN E5EN only Same as for control output 1 None Character Select OFF ON None Soak Time Unit M Minutes H Hours None Alarm SP Selection SP M Ramp set point SP Set point None Manual MV Limit Enable OFF ON None PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 1 to 999 Sampling period Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust ment OFF ON None Heater Overcurrent Use OFF ON OFF aN None Heater Overcurrent Latch OFF ON OFF aN None Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis 0 1 to 50 0 A PF Setting OFF OFF RUN RUN STOP STOP R S RUN STOP AT 2 100 AT execute cancel AT 1 40 AT execute cancel LAT Alarm Latch Cancel A M Auto manual PFDP Monitor setting item BFF Pint Lo 297 Parameters Monitor Setting Item 1 Characters Setting monitor value Disabled PV SP Multi SP PV SP MV PV SP Soak time remain Proportional band P Integral time I Derivative time D Alarm value 1 Alarm value upper limit 1 Alarm value lower limit 1 10 Alarm value 2 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 13 Alarm value 3 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 OANDAARWNH O Display Default Appendix Set value Monitor Setting Item 2 0 to 15 Same a
174. at finds PID constants by using step response tuning SRT when Controller operation begins or when the set point is changed Once the PID constants have been calculated ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged ST self tuning is enabled when the ST parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level When the ST function is in operation be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Digital Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved 64 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Note Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level Input Type Startup Conditions Note 1 2 3 ST Stable Range Operating Procedure Section 3 8 PID Constants When control characteristics are already known PID constants can be set directly to adjust control PID constants are set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and D
175. ater burnout alarm 80 moving to advanced function setting level 80 heating cooling control 98 HS alarm 82 moving to advanced function setting level 81 82 hysteresis 62 LBA detection time 119 password 112 PID ON OFF 61 Index saving 18 SP lower limit 106 SP upper limit 105 switching between SPs 102 shifting input values 89 simple program function 129 135 controlling start 103 starting 131 soak time 131 SP ramp 106 alarm operations 108 operation at startup 107 restrictions 107 specifications 275 Current Transformer CT 278 279 external power supply for ES1B 45 output 54 USB Serial Conversion Cable 280 ST self tuning 64 ST stable range 65 startup conditions 65 standard control 204 standby sequence 93 startup conditions 65 operation 107 support software port 45 T temperature input 12 13 shift values 93 temperature unit 4 54 terminals arrangement ESAN ESEN 32 ESCN 31 ESCN U 32 33 wiring 31 thermocouple 270 calibration 260 Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer input type 264 265 universal input type 265 three position control 60 transfer output 126 type 127 troubleshooting 284 two point shift 90 92 93 calculating 90 U up key 5 USB Serial Conversion Cable specifications 280 user calibration 260 V voltage input calibration 268 W wait band 131 wiring 35 auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 40 communications RS 232C 44 RS 485
176. ation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bi 4 A an d B an d C Dperation Type z TE waeneey and D 1H H m Te When conditions e EE x g A B C and D are 19 RUN STOP 3 ON OFF Always OFF x os 0s all satisfied Time Unit D tAways OFF 7 Ein Gs 150 Logic Operations Section 4 22 4 Selecting Input Assignments Select the input assignment for the work bit logic operation from the follow ing settings Parameter Setting range name Work Bit 1 Input 0 Always OFF Assignment A Always ON ON for one cycle when power is turned ON Event input 1 external input See note 1 See note 1 See note 1 See note 1 Event input 2 external input Event input 3 external input Event input 4 external input Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Control output ON OFF count alarm See note 2 Control output heating See note 3 Control output cooling See note 4 Input error Disabled HB heater burnout alarm HS alarm OC heater overcurrent alarm Auto Manual RUN STOP Disabled Program start AT Execute Cancel SP ramp operating Multi SP bit 0 Multi SP bit 1 Disabled Program end output Work bit 1 Work bit 2 Work bit 3 Work bit 4 Work bit 5 Work bit 6 Work bit 7 Work bit 8 Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignm
177. ation range 220 to 870 C 340 to 1 540 F 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 to 940 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F 20 0 to 120 0 C 40 0 to 250 0 F JPt100 199 9 to 500 0 C 199 9 to 900 0 F 199 9 to 520 0 C 199 9 to 940 0 F 0 0 to 100 0 C 0 0 to 210 0 F 20 0 to 120 0 C 40 0 to 250 0 F Thermocouple 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F 220 to 1 320 C 340 to 2 340 F 20 0 to 500 0 C 0 0 to 900 0 F 40 0 to 520 0 C 40 0 to 940 0 F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F 120 to 870 C 140 to 1 540 F 20 0 to 400 0 C 0 0 to 750 0 F 40 0 to 420 0 C 40 0 to 790 0 F 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 740 0 F 200 to 600 C 300 to 1 100 F 220 to 620 C 340 to 1 140 F 100 to 850 C 100 to 1 500 F 120 to 870 C 140 to 1 540 F 200 to 400 C 300 to 700 F 220 to 420 C 340 to 740 F 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 700 0 F 199 9 to 420 0 C 199 9 to 740 0 F 200 to 1 300 C 300 to 2 300 F 220 to 1 320 C 340 to 2 340 F 0 to 1 700 C 0 to 3 000 F
178. ator and the compensating con ductor can be substituted with the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for thermocouple K Cold junction E Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating conductor during calibration of a thermocouple Accord ingly short circuit enable or open disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to create a con tact or non contact state for the cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short circuit E5CN E5CN E5CN U E5CN U E5AN k E5AN E5EN f E5EN E5GN Compensating conductor E5GN Compensating conductor 261 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with thermocouple infrared temper ature sensor set as the input type 1 2 3 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a standard DC current voltage source STV precision digital multimeter DMM and contact junction compensator e g a zero con troller as in the figure to the thermocouple input terminals as shown in the figure below Leave open Zero controller OUTPUT INPUT W Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating co
179. auto tuning set the LBA Detection Time parameter advanced function setting level 119 Loop Burnout Alarm Determining the LBA Detection Time 1 2 3 LBA Level LBA Band Operating Procedure Operation Level nitial Setting Level ENE m Initial Setting Level Alarm 1 Type 120 Section 4 12 e To manually set the LBA detection time set the LBA Detection Time parameter to twice the LBA reference time given below 1 Set the output to the maximum value 2 Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band Measurement time Temperature TM PV LBA band MV 100 Time LBA detection time Tm x 2 3 Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time e Set the control deviation when the control loop is working properly e The default is 8 0 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 10 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs e There is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation does not change by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter e The default is 3 0 C F for Controlle
180. ave them displayed on the screen This function is disabled when the set value is 0 Sening range Om O70 9999 E Related Parameters Control output 2 ON OFF count monitor advanced function setting level Page 252 253 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Control outputs 1 and 2 must be sup RAL ON OFF Counter Reset ponon Relay or voltage outputs for driving SSR must be used ag e This parameter resets the ON OFF counter for specified control outputs Function Setting range 0 Disable the counter reset function m 1 Reset the control output 1 ON OFF counter Setting 2 Reset the control output 2 ON OFF counter Note After the counter has been reset the set value will be automatically returned to 0 E Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON OFF count monitor Control output 2 ON OFF count mon itor advanced function setting level Page 252 Initial setting communications protect CMT H 1 CMa Move to Calibration Level m s bed This parameter sets the password to move to the calibration level e Set the password to move to the calibration level The password is 1201 Move to the calibration level either by pressing the cel Key or LO Key or by Function waiting for two seconds to elapse E Related Parameter See Initial setting communications protect protect level Page 160 EXFN Extended Function This parameter sets an extended fun
181. ay 7 segment display 4 Function Setting range aN 11 segment display aF F 7 segment display oN 2 Setting When set to a an 11 segment display is used rr p The Program Pattern parameter Soak Time Unit must not be set to OFF e Set the soak time unit for the simple program function E Function Setting range Default A M Minutes H Hours M Setting E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain operation level Page 171 a Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Program pattern initial setting level Page 205 243 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Alarm 1 2 and 3 functions must be assigned The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF The ST parameter must be set to OFF The alarm type must be set to 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 AL SP Alarm SP Selection This parameter sets whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm dur ing SP ramp operation is to be the ramp SP or target SP e Set whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm is the ramp SP or target SP Function C Setingrans Defaut M P P M Setting E Related Parameters See SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 A ST initial setting level Page 205 MANL Manual MV Limit Enable e This parameter sets whether the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit param eters are to be enabled for manual MV in manual mode Function A
182. betes wth ate dec teainctnn Seman te 110 4 9 2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level 111 4 10 PV Change Color js s6 3s vA eee a ee ga hea eile ves 113 4 10 1 PV Color Change Function 0000000008 113 4 1052 Seti cb oe taeda taGalyt wee awk eh ots gos EAE 114 4 11 Alarm Delays ssi e hgh eh adobe ae eB pd Sh Rae lad Bae To EH 116 4 11 1 Alarm Delays tois ete ua tea i eee 116 4 12 Loop Burnout Alarme so eie p e eee 118 4 12 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 0 0 0 e ee eee eee eee 118 4 13 Performing Manual Control 0 0 0 122 4 13 1 Manual Operation 00 0 eee eee 122 4 14 Using the Transfer Output 0 00 00 eee eee eee 126 4 14 1 Transfer Output Function 00 0 0 20 eee eee ee 126 87 88 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 Using the Simple Program Function 0 0 0000002 eee eee 4 15 1 Simple Program Function 00 0 e eee eee 4 15 2 Operation at the Program End 0000 4 15 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program Output Adjustment Functions 4 16 1 Output Limits 4 16 2 MVatStop 4 16 3 MVatPVError Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Setting the Width of MV Variation 0 00 0 0 eee eee Setting the PF Key 4 19 1 PF Setting
183. between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Select the LBA Detection Time parameter by pressing the kel Key Press the lA Key to set the parameter to 10 Select the LBA Level parameter by pressing the Key Press the A Key to set the parameter to 8 0 The default is 8 0 Select the LBA Band parameter by pressing the kel Key Press the IA or gt Key to set the parameter to 3 0 The default is 3 0 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level 121 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 4 13 Performing Manual Control 4 13 1 Manual Operation e The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode if the PV MV param eter is displayed in the manual control level The final MV used in auto matic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode In manual mode the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV e The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode e Balanc
184. ble MV The manipulated variable is displayed when the MV Monitor Heating and MV Monitor Cooling parameters are set to ON and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF Function C Setingrange Deoram A aN Displayed af F Not displayed GFF Setting E Related Parameters See MV monitor heating Page 175 MV monitor cooling Page 176 operation e level REE Automatic Display Return Time e In the operation level adjustment level or monitor setting item level the display automatically returns to the PV SP if there are no key operations for the time set for this parameter e The automatic display return time is disabled when the parameter is set to OFF In that case the display will not be automatically switched Setting range Unt Default A OFF 1 to 99 aFF gt Function Setting n Alarm 1 must be assigned and the R iL Alarm 1 Latch alarm 1 type must not be 0 1 Alarm 2 must be assigned and the ReLE Alarm 2 Latch alarm 2 type must not be 0 or 12 AFLE Alarm 3 Latch Alarm 3 must be assigned and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 or 12 e When this parameter is set to ON the alarm function is held until one of the following conditions is satisfied a The power is cycled b The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel c The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel 4 F
185. cause they are set automatically by changing the control mode but they are shown here as a reference for checking the assignments for each out put 57 Setting Output Specifications Operation Level 58 Parameter Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level Control Output 1 Assignment Advanced Function Setting Level Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment nitial Setting Level Input Type 4 Select the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the Ice Select the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the Ice Section 3 5 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Sett
186. ce 1 MQ max Control output Relay output E5CN Relay output SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Long life relay output using a triac SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 1 000 000 operations Load power supply voltage 75 to 250 VAC See note 3 Leakage current 5 mA max 250 VAC 60 Hz SPDT 250 VAC 3A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Relay output SPST NO 250 VAC 5 A resistive load electrical dura bility 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Long life relay output using a triac SPST NO 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical dura bility 1 000 000 operations Load power supply voltage 75 to 250 VAC See note 3 Leakage current 5 mA max 250 VAC 60 Hz SPST NO 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Min applicable load 5 V 10 mA Voltage output Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP max load current 40 mA with short circuit protection circuit Note Control output 2 12 VDC 15 PNP max load cur rent 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit E5GN Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Load 500 Q max
187. ce control When ON self tuning Use the A and To execute o ST 5 keys to set ST EM arl To iE operates Set alarm type o OFF See TO canoe GFF a Check the _ B P Control Period It is recommended that 20 seconds control period Bag Heat 8 be set for a relay output and 2 aaa EH Unit Seconds seconds for an SSR voltage output cal Check the ret alarm type g ALE I Alarm 1 Type 2 BBS g cal Press the O key for PV SP at least 1 s after AT is Control starts stopped Operation Level B7 25 Use the A and ge 25 oe IGA keys to set jm 1 PV SP ISG H he SP to 150 C lgs 59 ge T Ae e al E e Press the O key pe ri Adjustment Je less than 1 s he set point To execute AT execution flashes during Level 100 AT fE 2 To execute 100 AT auto tuning executo auto tuning AT Execute AT I FIL To execute select Ht 2 To execute 40 AT execution O pa arr AT EE select A I To cancel AT select After AT is A aff AT cancel When PID stopped AT oF F control is H AL ee the C key oe for less than 1 s selected Ba OFF Operation Level During AT Canimi execution onfirm that me a the set point E ea PV SP B ARR is 150 C Baa 90 ee Ab i cal Operation Confirm that H R GHRumino FA cont
188. chieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side The pro portional bands P for the control outputs assigned to the heating cooling sides can be calculated using the following equations P for control output assigned to heating side P P for control output assigned to cooling side P for control output assigned to heating side x cooling coefficient The cooling coefficient is multiplied by the P for the control output assigned to the heating side to obtain control with characteristics that differ from those of the control output assigned to the heating side Output P for control output assigned to heat Pf P or contro output ing side x 1 0 F assigned to heat ing side x 1 0 P for control output assigned to cooling side PV P for control output assigned to heating side 4 assigned to cooling side PV 0 A Set point P for control output assigned to heating side x 1 5 By executing AT during heating cooling control the cooling coefficient can be automatically calculated along with the PID a Setting rage Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust ment OFF Disabled ON Enabled If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteristics such as when cooling water boils for cooling control it may not be possible to obtain the opti mum cooling coefficient at the Controller and control may take the form of 97 Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 osci
189. circuits and check the input type If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be replaced If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Note With resistance thermometer input a break in the A B or B line is regarded as a disconnection Operation at Error After an error occurs the error is displayed and the alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded If will also operate as if transfer output exceeded the upper limit When the Input Error Output parameter in the advanced function setting level is set to ON the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON whenever an input error occurs An error message is displayed when the PV PV SP or PV MV is displayed Note The control output turns OFF When the manual MV MV at stop or MV at PV error is set however the control output corresponds to the set value Display Range Exceeded Meaning Though this is not an error it is displayed if the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range The display ranges are shown below with decimal points omitted e When less than 1 999 CCEC 281 Appendix When more than 9 999 3333 Action Control continues allowing normal operation The message is displayed when th
190. city from your body 19 Do not remove the terminal block from the E5CN E5AN or E5EN Doing so may result in failure or malfunction Control outputs that are voltage outputs are not isolated from the internal circuits When using a grounded thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path causing error in the measured temperature When replacing the body of the E5CN E5AN or E5EN check the condition of the terminals If corroded terminals are used contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the E5CN E5AN or E5EN to increase possibly resulting in fire If the terminals are corroded replace the case as well When removing the terminal block of the E5GN to replace the Digital Temperature Controller check the condition of the terminals If corroded terminals are used contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital Temperature Controller to increase possibly resulting in fire If the terminals are corroded replace the terminal block as well Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller apart for disposal Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature Controller may cause injury 23 When applying Lloyd s standards install the Digital Temperature Controller according to the requirements given in Shipping Standards 24 Do not use the Temperature Controller if the front sheet is peeling off
191. controlled at 0 or 100 Output current mA 20 3 20 Transfer output value Control output MV The above graph is for when the linear current output type is set to 4 to 20 mA 127 Using the Transfer Output Section 4 14 Transfer Scaling e Reverse scaling is possible by setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter If the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters are set to the same value when 4 to 20 mA is set the transfer output will be output continuously at 0 4 mA If the SP SP during SP ramp or PV is selected the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be forcibly initialized to the respective upper and lower setting limits for changes in the upper and lower limits of the SP limiter and the temperature unit If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be initialized to 100 0 and 0 0 respectively when a switch is made between standard control and heating cooling control using the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter The output current when the linear current type is set to 4 to 20 mA the transfer output upper limit is set to 90 0 and the transfer output lower limit is set to 10 0 is shown in the following graph For scaling from 0 0 to 100 0 the output for 5 0 to 0 0 will be
192. couple 0 1 C Q for all specifica tions e Platinum resistance thermometer 0 1 C Q Current outputs Current output resolution Approx 2 700 Current output resolution Approx 10 000 Auxiliary outputs alarm outputs E5CN E5CN U ESGN 250 VAC 1A E5CN E5CN U ES5GN 250 VAC 3A 250 VAC 2A Input sampling cycle E Characteristics E5GN 500 ms E5GN 250 ms Previous models Upgraded models Model numbers for the E5CN Models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example ESCN R2MT 500 24 VAC VDC A D was added to the model numbers for models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example ES5CN R2MTD 500 24 VAC VDC Model numbers for the E5AN EN Example ESAN R3MT 500 100 to 240 VAC Example E5AN R3MT 500 24 VAC VDC N was added to all model numbers A D was added to the model numbers for models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example e E5AN R3MT 500 N 100 to 240 VAC e E5AN R3MTD 500 N 24 VAC VDC Model numbers for the E5GN Examples E5GN RTC 100 to 240 VAC E5GN RP 100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC DC Specification Example ESGN RTC 24 VAC DC e Model numbers have changed accompa nying the introduction of universal input capability A D was added to the model numbers for models with 24 VAC VDC power supply specifications Example E5GN RT 100 to 240 VAC E5GN RTD 24 VAC VDC Front panel PV
193. ction The Digital Controller must be manufactured in April 2015 or later version 6 1 or higher ai C Setingrans O Deam 0 Disabled 1 Enabled a Do not set any other value Setting Set this parameter to Enabled only when you want to use the following special application of the Digital Controller Using the Digital Controller as a backup for the host system setting the man ual manipulated value when backup operation starts to 100 and switching from manual mode to automatic mode 4 254 Communications Setting Level 5 9 Communications Setting Level Section 5 9 PSEL en pa u mwo bPS LEN Sbct PREY SdwW See Protocol Setting Communications Unit No Communications Baud Rate Communications Data Length Communications Stop Bits Communications Parity Send Data Wait Time Communications must be supported CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol e Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset e Match the communications specifications of the E5 N and the host com puter If multiple devices are connected ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system except the Communications unit number are the same Protocol setting Symbol Set values CWF Mad Settings CompoWay F SYSWAY Modbus Default Communications Unit No 0 to 99 0 to 99 Communications baud ra
194. ctive noise do not run the communications cable parallel to a power line If noise countermeasures are difficult to implement use an Optical Inter face Note For details on errors refer to ESCN ESAN ES5EN ESGN Digital Temperature Controllers Communica tions Manual Basic Type Cat No H158 287 Parameter Operation Lists Universal input Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Analog input Controllers with Analog Inputs Operation Level Parameters Process Value Characters Setting monitor value Temperature According to indication range for each sen sor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Display Default Appendix Set value Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper limit Auto Manual Switch Multi SP Set Point Setting 0to3 Set Point During SP Ramp SP lower limit to SP upper limit Heater Current 1 Value Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 Heater Current 2 Value Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 Leakage Current 1 Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 Leakage Current 2 Monitor 0 0 to 55 0 A Program Start RSET STRT RSEE SERE None Soak Time Remain 0 to 9999 minorh RUN STOP RUN STOP None Alarm Value 1 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 1999 to 9999 EU Alarm Value 2 1999 to 9999 EU
195. cutes operation accord ing to the set value When the Monitor Setting Item parameter is selected however the display is changed in order from Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed 5 This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF Monitor Setting Item Monitor Setting Item 1 Setting the PF Setting parameter to the Monitor Setting Item makes it possi ble to display monitor setting items using the function key The following table shows the details of the settings For setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameter em5 141 Setting the PF Key Section 4 19 Setting Remarks Monitor Setting Disabled PV SP Multi SP Can be set SP PV SP MV See note Can be set SP PV SP Soak time remain Can be set SP Proportional band P Can be set Integral time l Can be set Derivative time D Can be set Alarm value 1 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set Alarm value 2 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set Alarm value 3 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note For details on MV settings for heating and cooling control refer to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control on
196. cy 0 e eee eee eee 270 6 7 1 Thermocouple or Infrared Temperature Sensor 270 6 7 2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer 0004 271 6 7 3 Analog Input 5 4 i tte ce ds teen Paes a ea een eee 272 257 Parameter Structure Section 6 1 6 1 Parameter Structure e To execute user calibration enter the password 1201 at the Move to Cal ibration Level parameter in the advanced function setting level The mode will be changed to the calibration mode and Ad will be displayed e The Move to Calibration Level parameter may not be displayed when the user is doing the calibration for the first time If this happens set the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter in the protect level to 0 before moving to the advanced function setting level e The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF e The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as shown below Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Advanced Function Setting Level o Moves automatically according to input type Platinum resistance i Thermocouple or infrared l Analog input vb thermometer j __ lemperature sensor L E S 0 Pt100 1 Pt100 5 K 6 K 19 K140F 60C 23 0 to 50 mV 2 Pt100 TJ 8 J 2
197. d Multi SP not used EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 1 2 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation performed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event inputs 2 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi SP switching EV1 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 2 3 and parameters Not displayed Operation per formed with four Multi SP points Displayed Event inputs 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi SP switching EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV3 and EV4 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters Using Event Inputs Section 4 5 Two set points are set externally by using the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter e Switching is possible between two set points O and 1 by setting the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter to 1 The default setting is 1 and does not need to be changed to switch between two set points Set points 0 and 1 are specified by the status of event input 1 E5CN E5AN EN i EV1 Q VTS EV1 O4 HEVI
198. d function setting level Page 235 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level 235 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout and HS alarms must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned HSH HS Alarm Hysteresis The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON The HS Alarm Latch parameter must be set to OFF ez e This parameter sets the hysteresis for HS alarms Function Setting range Unt A 0 1 to 50 0 gt _ Setting E Related Parameters See HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 f Alarm 1 must be assigned LbA LBA Detection Time The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA This parameter enables or disables the LBA function and sets the detection time interval e Set the time interval for detecting loop burnouts l To disable the LBA function set 0 Function Setting range Umt A 010 9999 E Related Parameters See Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 LBA level Page 237 LBA band Page 237 advanced function setting level Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Alarm 1 must be assigned LbAL LBA Level The alarm type must be set to 12 LBA The LBA detection time must not be 0 e This parameter sets the LBA level l e If the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA level a loop burnout is detected
199. d lower limit ON qb Hie See note 2 Set the deviation in the set point by 1 Orr Le setting the alarm upper limit H SP rn and alarm lower limit L 2 Upper limit Xie ony Xe Set the upward deviation in the set 1 point by setting the alarm value X Lower limit X a ox ie Set the downward deviation in the a set point by setting the alarm value X 4 See note Upper and lower limit LiH See note 3 Set the deviation in the set point by 1 range r l setting the alarm upper limit H and alarm lower limit L 5 See note Upper and lower limit LEH See note 4 A standby sequence is added to i ON 1 me 1 with standby sequence OFF S the upper and lower limit alarm 1 See note 6 See note 5 Upper limit with standby ON Ke 1X A standby sequence is added to sequence OFF _ the upper limit alarm 2 See note 6 Lower limit with standby on Xi X A standby sequence is added to sequence the lower limit alarm 3 See note 6 Absolute value upper o e eX The alarm will turn ON if the pro limit cess value is larger than the alarm value X regardless of the set point Absolute value lower limit Xo SET The alarm will turn ON if the pro i cess value is smaller than the alarm value X regardless of the set point Absolute value upper X gt x gt A standby sequence is added to limit with standby i i the absolute value upper limit sequence alarm 8
200. del Notation The E5CN E5CN U E5AN ESEN O and E5GN are given as the E5CN E5CN U E5AN E5EN and E5GN when they share functionality The following notation is used when specifying differences in functionality Notation Options E5ON B Two event inputs E50N 03 RS 485 communications E5ON H One of HB HS and heater overcurrent detection E5ON HH Two of HB HS and heater overcurrent detection See note 1 E5SON OQ Control output 2 voltage output See note 1 E5O0N OOP External power supply to ES1B See note 1 E5ON 01 RS 232C communications See note 2 E5ON F Transfer output See note 3 Note 1 Excluding the E5GN 2 Excluding the E5CN 3 The E5AN and E5EN only Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names figures and in text explanations These abbreviations mean the following Symbol Term PV Process value SP Set point SV Set value AT Auto tuning ST Self tuning HB Heater burnout HS Heater short See note 1 OC Heater overcurrent LBA Loop burnout alarm EU Engineering unit See note 2 Note 1 A heater short indicates that the heater remains ON even when the control output from the Tempera tur
201. delay set 0 in Setting range Unit Default owes Sem 0 E Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 N Alarm 1 must be assigned and the R laf Alarm 1 OFF Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 S Alarm 2 must be assigned and the RAgaF Alarm 2 OFF Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 E Alarm 3 must be assigned and the AdaF Alarm 3 OFF Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Function m Setting Alarm 1 2 or 3 outputs are prevented from turning OFF until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed e Set the time for which the OFF delay is to be enabled e To disable the OFF delay set 0 Setting range Unit Default forse Second 0 E Related Parameters Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 g The input type must be thermocou L SEP Input Shift Type ple or resistance thermometer This parameter sets the shift method for thermocouple or resistance ther mometer inputs e When the input type is thermocouple or resistance thermometer set either a 1 point shift or a 2 point shift Function Setting range Default A LNS i 1 point shift c52 2 point shift Setting E Related Parameters See Temperature input shift Upper limit temperature input shift value Lower limit T temperature input shift value adjustment level Page 186
202. ding the characteristics of the control object is employed Either 40 AT or 100 AT can be selected depending on the width of MV variation in the limit cycle In the AT Execute Cancel parameter specify At e 100 AT or Ft i 40 AT To cancel AT specify aFF AT can Integral Time cel e Only 100 AT can be executed for heating and cooling control e AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON OFF con trol Derivative Time e The results of AT are reflected in the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters in the adjustment level Adjustment Level T j Proportional Band Note If ST self tuning parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level ST is exe cuted the first time operation is started and whenever the set point is changed This may cause the PID constants that were calculated by AT to be overwritten with new values To retain the PID constants that were calculated by AT turn OFF the ST parameter E Related Parameters See ST Self tuning initial setting level page 64 62 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup AT Operations Section 3 8 AT is started when either At 7 100 AT or HE 40 AT is specified for the AT Execute Cancel parameter During execution the AT Execute Cancel paramete
203. display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 6 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left G Set the STV to 6 mV coga Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the cl Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to 4 amp 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the el Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the kel Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF
204. e band band lt Pi gt Low Within High i SP PV The default is 5 0 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Ther mometer Universal Inputs and 5 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs To display the PV in a stable green display when the PV is within 15 0 C of the set point to enable checking the control process at a glance set the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters PV change color F LF Red to Green to Red PV stable band 15 0 C Release the protection before setting the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters to enable moving to advanced function setting level Refer to steps 1 to 8 on page 108 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key Use the Key to enter 169 the password w Move to the advanced function setting level by pressing the Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds 4 Select the PV Change Color parameter by pressing the kel Key PV Change Color Press the Section 4 10 A Key to se
205. e Ol ce Keys for at least 1 s Press the O c Keys for at least 3 s Display ja will flash Emon 1g after 1st Le PF Key See note 5 second Adjustment Level Press the O Key less than 1 s Monitor Setting Item Level t Press the O Key for at east 3 s Display will flash See T 15 after 1st second nels 1 EE 7 ae ut J Control stops Protect Level Press the O Key for at least 3 s while A M is displayed A will flash after 1st second Manual mode See note 4 Press the PF Key for at least 1 s Press the LO Key for at least 1 s Control Level Note The time taken to move to the protect level can P be adjusted by chang lt tions Serting ing the Move to pro Press the ae tect level time setting O Key for less than 1 s Refer to page 228 Input password while AMav is displayed Set value 169 Communica Initial Setting Press the O Key for at least 1 s Advanced Function Setting Level Input password Cc Control in progress Cc Control stopped Calibration Level See Not displayed for some models note 2 Level change Note 1 You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset 2 It is not possible to move to
206. e 1 E5CN AN EN GN 40 3 of PV or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit max E5CN U 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Platinum resistance thermometer 0 2 of PV or 0 8 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 0 2 FS 1 digit max CT input 5 FS 1 digit max Temperature variation influence See note 2 Voltage variation influ ence See note 2 Thermocouple R S B W PLII E5CN AN EN GN 1 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max E5CN U 2 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Other thermocouples E5CN AN EN GN 41 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max E5CN U 2 of PV or 4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max K thermocouple at 100 C max 10 C max Platinum resistance thermometer 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 1 FS 1 digit max CT input 5 FS 1 digit max Hysteresis Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Resistance Thermometer Uni in units of 0 1 C or F See note 3 versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 FS in units of 0 01 FS Proportional band P Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Resistance Thermometer Uni in units of 0 1 EU See note 3 versal Inputs Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 1 to 999 9 FS in units of 0 1 FS 0 01 to 99 99 FS in u
207. e Cancel Switching Setting Change Enable Disable Switching Alarm Latch Cancel Parameters Event input ON Direct operation cooling Reverse operation heating tore Reverse operation heating Direct operation cooling When AT 2 100 AT Execute Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assign ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter 100 AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 OFF 100 AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 ON 100 AT executed When AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assign ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter 40 AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 OFF 40 AT cancelled Event input 1 or 2 ON 40 AT executed When WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter the setting change will be disabled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be enabled when the input turns OFF Event input 1 or 2 OFF Enabled Event input 1 or 2 ON Disabled When LAT Alarm Latch Cancel is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter all alarm latches alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent latch will be cancelled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON Event i
208. e Controller is OFF because the SSR has failed or for any other reason 2 EU stands for Engineering Unit EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C m and g The size of EU varies according to the input type For example when the input temperature setting range is 200 to 1300 C 1 EU is 1 C and when the input temperature setting range is 20 0 to 500 0 C 1 EU is 0 1 C For analog inputs the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit XXX How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters The default is for 11 segment displays The Character Select parameter in the advanced function setting level can be turned OFF to display the following 7 segment characters Refer to page 243 XXxi xxxii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 Introduction esssssssessssssssessssssoseseoeo 1 2 6 1 1 Names of Parts 4 oii na ped Sates ith pals she SAR eR ARE BAS RSENS oe RSS 1 2 I O Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations 0 00 02 eee eee eee 15 1 4 Communications Function 0 0 00 eee ce eee tee nee 18 1 5 Insulation Block Diagrams 0 0 ccc eee teenies 20 SECTION 2 Preparations 2 sa020i2eisa ces
209. e E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection For information concerning the models that can be used with CX Thermo contact your OMRON sales representative Use the following procedure to connect the Temperature Controller to the per sonal computer using the USB Serial Conversion Cable The USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the personal computer To perform communications using USB Serial Conversion Cable set the communications port COM port number to be used for the software to the COM port assigned to the Cable 1 Turn ON the power to the Temperature Controller Note Ifthe Cable is connected when the power to the Temperature Con troller is OFF power will be supplied from the personal computer and impose a load on the internal circuits of the Temperature Con troller 2 Connect the Cable Connect the personal computer s USB port with the Support Software port on the Temperature Controller using the Cable 45 Using the Support Software Port Section 2 3 e Temperature Controller Connection Method ES5CN CN U Personal computer s USB port Communications port for S t Soft ree or Support Software iil SI CS a A O N ope He 10 0 odun o ooo Ooo E5EN E5AN pi foli ji eI 7 i Communications port N Communications port A L for Support
210. e PV PV SP or PV MV is dis played Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a Resistance thermometer input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 500 0 C setting range of 1999 to 500 0 C Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of Thermocouple input Except for models with a setting range of 199 9 to 400 0 C 199 9 to 400 0 C ES1B Control range m Control range S ERR display Numeric display 5 E F display S ERR display ccce display Numeric display S ERFR display Input indication range Input indication range Analog Input Analog Input e When display range lt control range e When display range gt control range Control range Control range SERR display cece display Numeric display a222 display SEFF display S ERR display Numeric display S ERR display Input indication range 1999 lt Display range 9999 1999 lt Display range 9999 See note See note Note The display range is shown in numbers with decimal points omitted AD Converter Error Meaning There is an error in internal circuits Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical n
211. e Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 5 Input type 0 Press the ce Key to display the count value for each input type The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexa decimal Set the 6 dial as follows e Input type 0 200 Q e Input type 1 2 30r4 140 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 6 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the 6 dial to 10 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the cl Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to 4 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the c Key This stores t
212. e http Awww omron com global or contact your Omron representative for published information OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted vii Application Considerations Suitability of Use Programmable Products Disclaimers Performance Data Change in Specifications Errors and Omissions Vili Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer s application or use of the Product At Buyer s request Omron will pro vide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limi tations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in com bination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the par ticular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN A
213. e set SP 3 PV SP Soak time remain Can be set SP 4 Proportional band P Can be set 5 Integral time I Can be set 6 Derivative time D Can be set 7 Alarm value 1 Can be set 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set Alarm value 2 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set Alarm value 3 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter E Related Parameters See PF setting Page 247 MV display selection Page 249 advanced function set ting level 248 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 SPdP m Function A Setting The No 3 display must be supported PV SP Display Screen Selection E5AN EN e This parameter sets the PV SP Screen No 3 display and order of display The default is 4 x A 2 level display is set at the time of shipping from the factory set val ue 0 A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized set value 4 Set value Display contents Only PV SP is displayed with no No 3 display PV SP Multi SP and PV SP MV are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Multi SP is displayed PV SP MV is displayed See note PV SP Multi SP and PV SP S
214. e settings This section describes the individual parameters used to setup control and monitor operation 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Conventions Used in this Section 2 0 0 ee ees 5 1 1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section 0 5 1 2 About Related Parameter Displays 5 1 3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5 1 4 Alarms Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level Monitor Setting Item Level Manual Control Level Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 00 000 e eee eee eee Communications Setting Level SECTION 5 158 158 158 158 158 159 163 177 196 197 199 218 255 Parameters 157 Conventions Used in this Section Section 5 1 5 1 Conventions Used in this Section 5 1 1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section m Function A Setting m Monitor Q Operation See Describes the functions of the parameter Describes the setting range and default of the parameter Used to indicate parameters used only for monitoring Describes the parameter settings such as those for Operation Commands and procedures Used to indicate information on descriptions in which the parameter is used or the names of related parameters 5 1 2 About Related Parameter Displays Parame
215. e to change the mode to automatic mode move to the operation level and display the top parameter in the operation level When MANU Auto Manual is selected for an event input the Auto Man ual Switch parameter is not displayed In that case switching between auto and manual mode is executed by using an event input The Auto Manual Select Addition parameter must be set to ON in the advanced function setting level before it is possible to move to manual mode The default is OFF 1 Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions Even when operation is stopped the manual MV is given priority Auto tuning and self tuning will stop when manual mode is entered 2 Manual MV and SP Ramp If operating the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered Use the following procedure to set the manipulated variable in manual mode 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Press the kel Key to select PID ON OFF and then select PID with the Key 3 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level 4 Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level 5 Select the
216. ed Overshooting and hunting occur but the set value is quickly reached and the temperature stabilizes Increased It takes a long time to reach the set point It takes time to achieve a stable state but overshooting undershooting and hunting are reduced Decreased Overshooting and undershooting occur Hunting occurs The Controller starts up faster Increased Overshooting undershooting and sta bilization times are reduced but fine vaug hunting occurs on changes in the curve itself Decreased Sai Overshooting and undershooting E EN increase and it takes time to return to value the set point 3 9 Alarm Outputs e Alarms can be used by the E5CN L12 2 auxiliary outputs E5AN ESEN O1000 1 auxiliary output E5AN E5EN L13 3 auxiliary outputs the E5CN O1000U 1 auxiliary output the ESCN L12 U 2 auxiliary outputs E5GN L11 1 auxiliary output and E5GN 02 2 auxiliary outputs Alarms can also be used by setting the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter to any of the alarms from alarm 1 to 3 The alarm output condition is determined by a combination of the alarm type alarm value alarm hysteresis and the standby sequence For details refer to 4 2 Alarm Hysteresis e This section describes the Alarm Type Alarm Value Upper limit Alarm and Lower limit Alarm parameters
217. ed oe Ee ep ee Be 22 2 1 1 Dimensions cse ae ni on 5 i be a aos Rea dg one 22 2 1 2 Panel Cutout onnensa E E teat auntie et oes 24 2 1 3 M N res yaa era awe see Be ey Se ae a 25 2 1 4 Removing the Temperature Controller from the Case 28 2 2 Wiring Terminals scce escnis scorto ouat setten cc u Eora nea 31 2 2 1 Terminal Arrangement 00 0 0 eee eee eee 31 2 2 2 Precautions when Wiring 0 0 e eee eee eee 33 2 23 WINS nese oeced gee Sede Weare E E E oY ee 35 2 3 Using the Support Software Port 00 00 eee ee ee eee 45 21 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm E5CN 44 8 x 44 8 48 8
218. ed two notes and references to Setting range for Control output heating and Control output cooling April 2015 Made revisions accompanying addition of an extended function version 6 1 June 2015 Page vii Deleted section entitled Read and Understand this Manual Page 281 Added information on transfer output under Operation at Error 317 Authorized Distributor
219. eless bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching from manual operation to automatic operation See note e If a power interruption occurs during manual operation manual operation will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted e Switching between automatic and manual operation is possible for a max imum of one million times e Manual operation can be used only for PID control Note In balanceless bumpless operation the MV before switching is used initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after switching operation The overall manual operation is illustrated in the following figure MV Balanceless bumpless N 0 i a Time A 1 MV switched OFF ON i Power in t terrupted Related Displays and Parameters Parameter name Remarks PV MV Manual MV Manual Control Level 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 See note 2 Auto Manual Switch A M Operation Level Switches between automatic and manual modes Auto Manual Select Addi AMAd Advanced Function Setting Enables switching between automatic and man tion Level ual modes Note 1 Refer to 4 16 Output Adjustment Functions for information on the priority for the MV 2 For Manual MV Limit Enable this value will be between the MV upper limit and the MV
220. endix Note 1 2 3 Rating Event inputs The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the 200 to 1 300 C range T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100 C or less and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 C to 800 3 C or less is not specified The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is 3 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is the larger of 0 3 or 3 C 1 digit maximum and the indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is the larger of 0 3 or 2 C 1 digit maximum Ambient temperature 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 of rated voltage Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs and Characteristics of Options Contact Input ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min Non contact Input ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Communications Transmission path RS 485 232C Communications method RS 485 2 wire half duplex or RS 232C Synchronization Start stop Baud rate 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps Transfer output 4 to 20 mA DC Load 600 Q max Resolution 10 000 Accuracy 0 3 Waterproof Packing If the Waterproof Packing is lost or damage order one of the following models Y92S 29 for DIN 48 x 48 Y92S P4 for DIN 96 x 96
221. ent A Assignment B Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment C Work Bit 1 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment D to to Work Bit 8 Input Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Assignment D Note 1 The event inputs that can be used depend on the Controller model 151 Logic Operations 152 Section 4 22 2 Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON OFF count alarm is ON 3 Setting 11 control output heating gives the status of control output 1 However if control output 1 is a current output setting 11 control output heating will always produce OFF 4 Setting 12 control output cooling gives the status of control output 2 10 11 However if there is no control output 2 setting 12 control output cool ing will always produce OFF Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Inputs A to D Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed inputs A to D Normally open Normally closed Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Work Bits Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed work bits Normally open Normally closed Setting ON Delay Times When an input with ON delay turns ON the output will turn ON after the set delay time has elapsed The setting range is 0 to 9 999 The default is 0 disabled Setting O
222. ent Input Assignment 1 2 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation performed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event inputs 2 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi SP switching EV1 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 2 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation per formed with four Multi SP points Displayed Event inputs 3 and 4 cannot be used for multi SP switching EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 EV3 and EV4 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 3 and 4 parameters Only event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi SP function Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points Number of Multi SP Uses 1 Even input 1 Selected set point OFF Set point 0 ON Set point 1 Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Even input 1 Even input 2 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 e The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 is displayed None RUN STOP Auto Manual Switch Pr
223. ent alarm or input error is case This applies only to Controllers sent to the output to which the alarm 1 with auxiliary output 2 function is assigned Side View of ESGN series Controller ilij o z J mp mB mO j Pam 3 D EL eg s en o o eS oo Auxiliary output 2 5 o FE a e il connection screws I o U A es oa Yo oes er Bottom View of E5GN series Controller E bite output Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 2 2 2 Precautions when Wiring Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise e Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the E5GN The stripping lengt
224. equence is added to the lower limit alarm 3 See note 6 Absolute value upper limit The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is larger than the alarm value X regardless of the set point Absolute value lower limit The alarm will turn ON if the pro cess value is smaller than the alarm value X regardless of the set point Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence A standby sequence is added to the absolute value upper limit alarm 8 See note 6 Absolute value lower lim with standby sequence it A standby sequence is added to the absolute value lower limit alarm 9 See note 6 LBA alarm 1 type only Refer to page 118 See note 7 70 PV change rate alarm Note Refer to page 72 See note 8 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON H lt 0 L lt 0 L HSP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 sor 20 IH lt ILI H gt ILI H LSP IHI gt IL H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IHI lt L 3 Set value 4 Lower limit range Alarm Outputs oo 9 2 Alarm Values Alarm Lower Limit Value Alarm Upper Limit Value Alarm Value O D ts T mej Q U ie O D Q i i Initial Setting Level BONE m
225. er Limit SP lower limit 1 to scaling upper Set Point Lower Limit Scaling lower limit to SP upper E Related Parameters Input type Page 200 Temperature unit Page 202 initial setting level 203 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 PID ON OFF e This parameter selects 2 PID control or ON OFF control e The auto tuning and self tuning functions can be used in 2 PID control Function Seningrane Dotan M Pid 2 PID aNaF ON OFF ING Setting E Related Parameters See AT execute cancel Page 179 Manual reset value Hysteresis heating and as Hysteresis cooling Page 190 adjustment level ST stable range advanced function setting level Page 224 S HE Standard or Heating Cooling Function a Setting See Note e This parameter selects standard control or heating cooling control e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5CN or E5CN U the auxiliary output 2 terminal SUB2 is assigned as the control output cool ing e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5AN or E5EN the auxil iary output 3 terminal SUB3 is assigned as the control output cooling e When heating cooling control is selected for the E5GN the auxiliary out put 1 terminal SUB1 is assigned as the control output cooling If standard control is selected set the Control Output 1 Assignment to 4 con trol output heating for either direct cooling or reverse
226. er Supply for ES1B Blank None Q Control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR Y Long life relay output hybrid H Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT1 HH Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT2 P Power supply for sensor 4 Option M Option Unit can be mounted 5 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer input L Analog current voltage input 6 Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC 7 Case Color Blank Black W Silver 8 Terminal Cover 500 With terminal cover 9 Version N Available only to models released after January 2008 10 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 E5GN Temperature input Control Control output or analog input section heating Control output cooling jHeating cooling 7 Auxiliary output 1 Standard A arm 1 HB alarm CT1 input HS alarm OC alarm li Input error Event inputs 2 channels Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Program end Communications function Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign ment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level 11 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Model Number S
227. eration of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bil gt Operation Type TEE Work Bit is used by Aunty Output 1 Work Bit 1 Always OFF e Operation 1 SaaS eee a Operation of Work Bi 4 Operation of Work BRS Operation of Work Ba 4L A and B or C and D s wuss When conditions A 4H nm ie and B or conditions C E me wa and D are satisfied 4 1 e os tava OF T Pannor a tet Operation 2 Operation of Work BR 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work BiL4 A or C and B or D OAiways OFF Aways OFF Pram Bl snare a rtp When condition A or pay uel wokan C and condition B or mee ten D are satisfied 4 4 149 Logic Operations Section 4 22 e Operation 3 Operation of Work Bit1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bid gt A or B or C or D Operation Type g ion 3 Work Bit 1 is used by iti ON OFF Dolay masta When condition A Input A 7 Alarm 1 B ies foo B C or D is satisfied Input B TSRUN STOP pi FL ou Always OFF ON OFF 0 0 Aways OFF j j Time Unit Cnn Ce e Operation 4 Operation of Work BR 1 Operation of Work Bi 2 Oper
228. erivative Time D parameters in the adjustment level This procedure executes self tuning ST 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the ST parameter by pressing the kel Key 3 Press the A Key to select a ON is the default 4 To return to the operation level press the C Key for at least one second The temperature display flashes during self tuning ST execution Self tuning by step response tuning SRT is started when the following condi tions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed At start of operation When set point is changed The set point at the start of operation differs from the set point when the pre vious SRT was executed See note 1 The difference between the tempera ture at the start of operation and the set point is greater both of the following Present proportional band x 1 27 4 C and the ST stable range The temperature at the start of opera tion is lower than the set point during reverse operation and is larger than the set point during direct operation There is no reset from input errors The new set point differs from the set point used when the previous SRT was executed See note 1 The set point change width is greater both of the following Present propor tional band x 1 27 4 C and
229. es reversing 40 AT Execute Cancel status See note 1 LAT LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling alarm latches See note 2 A M A M Auto Manual Specifies reversing Auto Manual status See note 3 PFDP PFdP Monitor Setting Item Specifies the monitor setting item dis play Select the monitor setting item using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters advanced function setting level 1 When AT cancel is specified it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being executed is 100 AT or 40 AT 247 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 2 Alarms 1 to 3 heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled 3 For details on auto manual operations using the PF Key refer to 4 73 Per forming Manual Control E Related Parameters See Monitor setting item 1 to 5 advanced function setting level Page 248 PFd Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 ce a a e Set the PF Key parameter to Monitor Setting Item to enable using the function key to display monitor setting items The items that will be dis played are set using the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The set Function tings are listed in the following table Set value Setting Remarks a Monitor Setting Symbol 0 Disabled Setting 1 PV SP Multi SP Can be set SP 2 PV SP MV See note Can b
230. et point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 Note The set point can also be switched using communications 4 5 3 Settings Switching between Set Points 0 1 2 and 3 Operating Procedure The following example sets the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter to 2 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation PV SP level to the initial setting level Number of Multi SP Uses Setting 2 Select the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter by pressing the el Key Number of Multi SP Uses 3 Use the Al Key to set the parameter to 2 Set points 0 1 2 and 3 will be set according to the ON OFF states of event inputs 1 and 2 ESCN ESAN EN E5GN v EV1 Q4 EM Nev Q Ev O EVI EV2 lt HEVI D EV 4 EV2 Ev2 Ev2 EV2 4 5 4 Operation Commands Other than Multi SP The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 is displayed Setting Function None RUN STOP Auto Manual Program Start See note 1 Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 WEPE Setting Change Enable Disable LAE Alarm Latch Cancel 102 Using Event Inputs Note Executing Run Stop
231. eter to a K thermocouple Make sure the setting of the input type parameter agrees with the temperature sensor that is being used The terminal block has also been changed which means the wiring methods and terminal arrangement are different Other changes outlined in the following tables Refer to relevant pages in the manual for details Previous models Upgraded models ESCN CN U N OUTIJISTOP Ow OUT2 CMW MANU MAU J ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator E5AN R 8 aim GABH e Number of displays 2 PV and SV Number of displays 3 PV SV and MV e ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator xviii Previous models Upgraded models e Number of displays 2 PV and SV omron ESGN CMW STOP OUT CAA aaae eA Display Segments PV 7 segments SV 7 segments Character Heights PV 7mm SV 3 5 mm BARA i m WW Number of displays 3 PV SV and MV e ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator e Display Segments PV 11 segments SV 11 segments e Character Heig
232. evel Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error displays L i Page 283 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF parameter must be set to ON Hb Heater Burnout Detection 1 This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output e The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls l below the setting of this parameter e When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON a Setting range Unit Default foots00 a o Function Setting E Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater burnout detection Heater burnout latch Heater burnout hysteresis advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Overcurrent Use ON OFF parameter must be set to ON ol Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the l value set for this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF When the set va
233. evel is displayed Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level Heater 4 Press the cel Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter Overcurrent Check that this parameter is set to ON the default and then set the Use Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter Setting Heater Overcurrent Detection 5 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the advanced PV SP function setting level to the initial setting level Press the O key again for at least one second to move to the operation level Adjustment Level 6 Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display Heater Current 7 Press the ce Key to select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter 1 Value Monitor Check the current value and then set the Heater Overcurrent Detection parameter Heater 8 Press the kel Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter Overcurrent Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 75 when setting 9 For this example set 20 0 To return to
234. evious models RS 485 RS 232C external communications and Setup Tool communications can be used at the same time Mounting Bracket E5AN EN only Mounting Bracket for previous models Upgraded models Modified section Mounting Bracket for upgraded models Note The Mounting Bracket for the previous models cannot be used for upgraded models Packing case E5AN EN only e Previous ID code N5 TYPE E5AN R3MT 500 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMP MULTI RANGE _ 100 240 VAC OT No B N5 LOT No QYT 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA VOLTS New ID code N6 TYPE E5AN R38MT 500 N TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMP MULTI RANGE VOLTS 5 100 240 VA x Ne LOT No QYTA OMRON on MADE IN CHINA Terminal Cover sold separately for E5CN E53 COV10 for E5CN only e E53 COV17 for E5CN only Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models xxvii Previous models Upgraded models Terminal Cover sold separately for ESAN EN Front Panel Labels E5GN xxviii e E53 COV11 E59 COVIT OMRON LEC CCCCCOOGG omron E5GN CMW STOP QUT Bee lt r e Display area dimensions 36 1 x 9 8 mm W x H e E53 COV16 Note The Terminal Cover for the previous models cannot be used for improved models omron E5GN CMW STOP QUT MANU SUBI SUB HA Wi if Z
235. g operation level Page 167 Number of multi SP uses Initial setting level Page 213 Mf The ST parameter must be set to SPRL SP Ramp Time Unit OFF e This parameter sets the time unit for the rate of change during SP ramp l operation Function somno Doran 5 EU s M EU min H EU h Setting E Related Parameters See Ramp SP monitor operation level Page 167 SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 220 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 RESE Standby Sequence Reset agrees ee erage or 7 e This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby l sequence of the alarm has been canceled Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e Condition A Control started including power ON and set point alarm value alarm value upper lower limit or input shift value upper lower limit temperature input shift value changed Condition B Power ON e The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lower limit alarm with standby sequence Function Condition A only SP change Y Alarm Be ares Phe ctu sega an ate en after change Alarm hysteresis A O Standby sequence canceled Alarm L Standby sequence reset Alarm SNS SL Condition A Alarm output ee os Condition B a Sninga Do
236. ge Current 1 Hysteresis Heatin B Cp i i E BLER e ere y 9 E SIE R Soak Time Remain A MV Monitor Heating ic Sa oe Ss oo 5 0 em an Control Period Cooling qa Hysteresis settings ta B H5 i HS Alarm 1 Hysteresis Cooling E L g M Monitor Cooling Bas 50 0 c 0o Direct Reverse Operation V ce ca E rpa Leakage Current 2 Soak Time ay Fel Monitor Press the O and amp Keys for Press the IOI Key AN J atleast 3 s Press the O and Keys for at least 15 Jess than 1 s eer ee ke a i g F Wait Band Communications E To a Protect Level Ee i v B soo The time taken to move to the protect level setlingiEovel LH ie le time taken to move to the protect level Displayed only for models with communications i j can be adjusted by changing the Move to Changes are effective after cycling power or after m g G pj SPO MV at Stop protect level time setting epeei iia eee B Mm 1 Move to Protect Level Es TOF Displayed only when a password E PGE Protocol Seting ke Easy a B at estricts moving to protect E ChE aon MS eae p5p P MV at PV Error ca evel Em CuF GompoWay SYS B o Operation Adjustment Protect 3 SP used by Restricts displaying and modi B N g Communications Unit No 4 ca multi SP fying menus in operation ad B Er SP2 SP Ramp Set Value justment and manual control Bes t E 5P 2 levels I A Esa a Initial Setting Ci icati TE E Z PE Communicatons Protect E bPS BaudRate S Note SETA Eii i
237. gister the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 When the cl Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to YES Release the key and wait two seconds or press the cel Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the Eel Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the IA Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 269 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 6 7 Checking Indication Accuracy e After calibrating the input be sure to check the indication accuracy to make sure that the calibration has been executed correctly Operate the E5CN CN U AN EN in the process value set point monitor mode e Check the indication accuracy at the following three values upper limit lower limit and mid point To check the range of an infrared sensor set the input type parameter to 6 i e a K thermocouple and input a voltage that is equivalent to the start ing power of a K thermocouple 6 7 1 Thermocouple or Infrared Temperature Sensor e Preparations The
238. gned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output e An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set l ting of this parameter e When the set value is 50 0 the HS alarm output is turned OFF When the set value is 0 0 the HS alarm output will turn ON A Setting range Unit Defaut 0 0 to 50 0 50 0 Function Setting E Related Parameters See Leakage current 2 monitor adjustment level Page 185 HS alarm use HS alarm latch HS alarm hysteresis advanced function set ting level Page 235 185 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 SP a SP 0 The Number of Multi SP Uses parameter must be set to 1 or 2 SFP SP 1 The Multi SP Uses parameter must SP SP2 be set to ON SP 9 SP 3 These parameters set the set points when the multi SP function is used The values set in these parameters can be selected by operating the keys on the front panel or by using event inputs e When the set point has been changed the set value of the set point 0 to 3 selected by the multi SP inputs is also changed to the same value e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor During ana log input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting A semings m SP lower limit to SP upper limit t Function Setting E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 Input type ini
239. h is 5 to 6 mm for the E5CN E5AN or E5EN and 6 to 8 mm for the E5GN e Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals e Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals e Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and E5GN and to 0 74 to 0 90 N m for other models The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN 33 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 e For the E5CN E5AN or E5EN use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 5 screws Bee 7 2 mm max te e For the E5GN use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 0 screws F ae 5 8 mm max To 8 mm max e For E5GN screwless clamp terminal blocks use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm The length of the conductive portion inserted into the termi nal must be 10 mm for wires and 8 to 12 mm for ferrules Ferrules must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter 8 to 12mm an Ferrules wires e Recommended Ferrules for ESGN Screwless Clamp Terminals Manufacturer Model number Altech Corp 2623 0 Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg Co AVA 0 5 J S T Mfg Co TUB 0 5 Nichifu Co Single 1 wire TGNTC 1 25 9T TGVTC 1 25 11T TGNTC 1 25 11T TC0 3 9 5 TC1 25 11S ST TC1 25 11S TC2 11S Double 2 wires TGWVTC 1 25 9T TGWVTC 1 25 11T e Use wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 0 205 to 0 823 mm for auxiliary output 2 on the
240. he HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 2 value monitor will flash i Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level 4 Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays L 2 Page 283 169 Operation Level Section 5 3 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be LER I Leakage Current 1 Monitor supporicd g Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits Function The heater current is measured and the leakage current 1 monitor is dis played e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less G Monitor range Umt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash Monitor E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 Failure detection advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays L LF i Page 283 Heater burnout HS alarms and hea
241. he manual MV will be re stricted by the MV limit For heating cooling control upper and lower limits are set of overall heat ing cooling control They cannot be set separately for heating cooling Output Heating MV Cooling MV r MV lower limit pons tren tgttr totter seen MV upper limit 4 16 2 MV at Stop The MV when control is stopped can be set For heating cooling control the MV at stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive When setting the MV when control is stopped set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter advanced function setting level to ON The default is 0 0 so an MV will not be output for either standard or heat ing cooling control Setting range Umt Default MV at STOP 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing control Note The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at stop gt MV at PV error 136 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4 17 4 16 3 MV at PV Error e The MV to be output for input errors can be set The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV takes pri ority in manual mode marra ant aw MV at PV ERROR 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing control Note The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at stop gt MV at PV error e The order of priority of
242. he parameter to 1234 password input Protect Level 3 Move to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter by pressing the O or ce Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds Operation Adjust ment Protect E Example with No Password Set Operation Level PV SP Protect Level Press the O and cei Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Operation Adjust Operation Adjustment Protect parameter to move from the operation level to ment Protect the protect level When a password is not set the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed 111 Using the Key Protect Level Section 4 9 Setting the Password Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the password to move to the protect level E Example To set the Password to 1234 Operation Level PV SP Protect Level 1 Press the O and ce Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the Operation Adjust Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level ment Protect to the protect level Protect Level 2 Select the Password to Move to Protect Level
243. he temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the kel Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF 6 5 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input with an analog input 0 to 50 mV set as the input type E5CN U Input power supply ESAN EN E5GN Input power supply Input power supply 265 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 5 1 2 3 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals same as ther mocouple inputs as shown in the figure above 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed 5 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV to 54 mV Allow the count value on the No 2
244. heater etc at the same time or turn ON the load power supply first Accurate self tuning and optimum control will not be possible if the power supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON the power sup ply to the Temperature Controller 62 Control cycle is longer compared with the speed of rise and fall in tem perature Shorten the control cycle A shorter control cycle improves control performance but a cycle of 20 ms minimum is recommended in consideration of the service life of the relays Unsuitable PID con stant Set appropriate PID constants using either of the following methods e Execute AT autotuning e Set PID constants individually using man ual settings HS alarm operation fault Use breeder resistance if the problem is due to leakage current Also investigate the errors detected by the HS alarm function Temperature is not rising Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation Select either forward or reverse operation depending on the required control Reverse operation is used for heating operations Heater is burnt out or deteriorated Check whether heater burnout or deteriora tion have occurred Also investigate the errors detected by the heater burnout alarm Insufficient heater capacity Check whether the heater s heating capac ity is sufficient Cooling system in operation Check whether a cooling s
245. hts PV 7 5 mm SV 3 6 mm e Changes to Display Contents AL LED indicator eliminated LED indicators added and key indicator added A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized xix E Terminal Arrangements Previous models Upgraded models E5AN EN Terminals 16 through 20 were changed Terminals 1 through Ext One CT Control Output 2 peer eee 15 were not changed Two CTs supply Voltage output Long life relay External power One CT lt ee ee ann output supply for ES1B Two CTs CT1 Control Output 2 supply SSI 1 J 12 VDC 20 mA cena Output 2 OF lt a3 N 7 Control Output 2 250 VAC 3 A 12 VDC 20 mA CTi DONOT DONOT 12 VDC 21 mA i E gt a Cos USE USE Resistive load a AR 7 CT2 DO NOT D USE E ee m A l i DONOT A DONOT e l L p USE US a B i gt iy Oey Ais L lt lt k oV wel OF P Pi Te DO NOT o E TC Pt universal input Analog input d9 lt TC Pt universal input Analog input Previous models Upgraded models Number of terminals 9 1 to 9 Number of terminals 14 1 to 14 Input terminals 7 to 9 Input terminals 10 to 12 RS 485 communications terminals 5 and6 RS 485 communications terminals 7 and 8 Coren ia ai netted PE DO NOT 4 4 A A 4 4 A A A RS 232C SD RD SG vaai
246. hts when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param eter is ON SUB3 Sub 3 E5AN EN Only Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment param eter is ON 2 HA Heater Burnout Heater Short Alarm Heater Overcurrent Detection Output Display Lights when a heater burnout heater short alarm or heater overcurrent occurs 3 OUT1 Control Output 1 Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 1 turns ON For a current output however OFF for a 0 output only OUT2 Control Output 2 Excluding the E5GN Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 2 turns ON For a current output however OFF for a 0 output only 4 STOP Lights when operation is stopped During operation this indicator lights when operation is stopped by an event or by key input using the RUN STOP function 5 CMW Communications Writing Lights when communications writing is enabled and is not lit when it is dis abled 6 MANU Manual Mode Lights when the auto manual mode is set to manual mode 7 Om Key Lights when settings change protect is ON i e when the A and Keys are disabled by protected status The temperature unit is displayed when parameters are set to display a tem perature The display is determined by the currently set value of the Tempera ture Unit parameter f indicates C and F indicates F This indicator flashes during ST
247. ical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions E Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used CAUTION E Symbols Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Symbol Meaning Caution General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions Prohibition General Prohibition Indicates non specific general prohibitions Mandatory Caution SOP gt General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers ix E Safety Precautions A CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric AN shock Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product where subject to flammable or ex
248. ing Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit SP upper limit Set point during SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP ramp PV Temperature Input setting range lower limit Input setting Input setting to input setting range upper range lower range upper limit limit limit Analog Analog scaling lower limit to Scaling lower Scaling upper analog scaling upper limit limit limit MV monitor Standard 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 100 0 heating Heating 0 0 to 105 0 cooling MV monitor 0 0 to 105 0 cooling E Related Parameter See Transfer output type initial setting level Page 210 a ee Linear Current Output Control output 1 must be a current output This parameter selects the output type for linear current outputs a Linear current output Setting 4 20 4 to 20 mA 4 20 0 20 0 to 20 mA Note Even when control output 1 is used as a control output or a simple transfer output 0 to 20 mA can be used E Related Parameter See Transfer output type initial setting level Page 210 212 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Number of Multi SP Uses An event input must be assigned e Multi SP is a function for setting set points 0 to 3 in advance and switch signals Function two and four preset set points 0 Setting range Defaut i Setting Aoo ing between these set points using a combination of event input ON OFF e The Number of Multi SP Uses parameter is used to switch be
249. ing 105 0 to 0 0 E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF Page 204 ST Page 205 initial setting level 193 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 2 PID control must be used QRL MV Change Rate Limit ST must be OFF e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable varia tion in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated 4 Function value is reached If the limit is set to 0 0 this function will be disabled e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will not operate in the following sit uations In manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped MV output during STOP e During MV output when error occurs A Setting range Unit Default oowoo s oo Setting E Related Parameters See Proportional band adjustment level Page 188 The input type must be an analog m 7 input and the Extraction of Square SURP Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point Root Enable parameter must be set to ON e This parameter sets the extraction of square root low cut point used for the inputs The data after extracting the square root is shown below e The low cut point is used for extracting the square root for flowrate sen sors 4 Function Operation result 100 FS ja Extraction of square root low cu
250. ing Level Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Select the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the ke Key Press the A or Key to set a The default is Select the Control Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the ke Key Press the A or Key to set L a When H L is selected for the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter the setting will be a Key Press the A or Key to set ALM i I la The default is AL I Key Press the A or Key to set AL Me The default is AL Me Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Setting the Set Point SP Section 3 6 Auxiliary Output e When close in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output is output Opening or Closing in unchanged When open in alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output Alarm function is reversed before being output e Each auxiliary output can be set independently e These settings are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm
251. ing parameter and confirm that it is set to A M A M is the default setting nitial Setting Level 8 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced ETNE Input Type function setting level to the initial setting level 9 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Manual Control Level 10 Press the PF Key for at least one second to move from the operation level to the manual control level 11 Press the A or Key to set the manual MV In this example the MV is set to 50 0 Note The manual MV setting must be saved see page 18 but values changed with key operations are reflected in the control output immediately Operation Level 12 Press the PF Key to move from the manual control level to the operation level 4 14 Using the Transfer Output 4 14 1 Transfer Output Function e To use a transfer output change the setting for the Transfer Type parame ter to anything other than OFF This will enable the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters 126 Transfer Output Type Note e The o
252. ing specifications is required e USB port CD ROM drive e Windows 2000 XP Vista Appearance and Nomenclature Appearance Appendix 250 mm LED SD 1 765 mm 1 Hs ee N C x USB connector type A plug LED RD LED Indicator Display Status Meaning Serial connector Lit Sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not sending data from USB Serial Conversion Cable Lit Receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable 280 Not lit Not receiving data from the USB Serial Conversion Cable Appendix Error Displays When an error occurs the error contents are shown on the No 1 or the No 2 display This section describes how to check error codes on the display and the actions to be taken to remedy the problems Input Error Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range See note The input type setting is not correct The sensor is disconnected or shorted The sensor wiring is not correct The sensor is not wired Note Control Range Resistance thermometer thermocouple input Temperature setting lower limit 20 C to temperature setting upper limit 20 C Temperature setting lower limit 40 F to temperature setting upper limit 40 F ES1B input Same as input indication range Analog input 5 to 105 of scaling range Action Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring disconnections and short
253. ion Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV SP Display 1 PV SP Display 2 Ser Jr Press the co oT JC L I key L mn mn IILI LILt Seo Sad Son SPO PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit Page 203 ini tial setting level PV SP display screen selection advanced function setting level Page 249 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 parameters must not be set to Auto Manual and the Auto Manual Select A M Auto Manual Switch Addition parameter must be set to ON The control must be set to 2 PID control e This parameter switches the Controller between automatic and manual modes e If the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds when the Auto Manual Operation Switch parameter is displayed the manual mode will be entered and the manual control level will be displayed e This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to MANU auto manual E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 BE Auto manual select addition advanced function setting level Page 234 166 Operation Level Section 5 3 P Multi SP Set Point Setting The Multi SP Uses parameter must M SP be set to ON Set Points 0 to 3 To use the multi SP function preset the four set points SP O to 3 in the adjustment level and then swi
254. ional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control E Function Setting range Defaut a aN Enabled aFF Disabled Setting E Related Parameters See Cooling coefficient adjustment level Page 189 245 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be all Heater Overcurrent Use supported Alarm 1 must be assigned e Set this parameter to use the heater overcurrent alarm Function Setting range Defaut i aN Enabled FF Disabled Setting Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be all Heater Overcurrent Latch supported two CTs Alarm 1 must be assigned e When this parameter is set to ON the heater overcurrent alarm is held until any of the following conditions is satisfied a Heater overcurrent detection is set to 50 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Seting range Default A SW Enabled SFF Disabled 4 Function Setting E Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment a level Pages 181 and
255. ipment refer to the respective instruction manuals 6 3 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input e Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple thermocouple 1 group input types 5 7 11 12 15 and thermocouple 2 group input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 e When calibrating do not cover the bottom of the Controller Also do not touch input terminals pins terminals 4 and 5 on the E5CN pins 1 and 2 on the E5CN U pins 19 and 20 on the ESAN E5EN or pins 11 and 12 on the E5GN or compensating conductors 260 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 6 3 1 Preparations Input Input nput power supp put power supply y Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Input power supply Input power supply Ly L Cold junction compensator compensator 0 C 32 F 0 C 32 F Compensating conductor Compensating conductor e Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of internal thermocouples to 0 C Make sure that internal thermocouples are dis abled i e that tips are open e In the above figure STV indicates a standard DC current voltage source e Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocou ple When thermocouples R S E B W or PLII or an infrared temperature sensor is used the cold junction compens
256. is reduced Set value 7 v ieee Set value ATN A Time A Time Start of control Start of control 66 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 e When the temperature PV falls short of the set point for the PID con stants when using AT or ST in normal mode executing AT or ST in RT mode tends to improve performance Temperature Temperature Set value Set value 5 Time A Time Start of control Start of control e When the manipulated variable MV is saturated the amount of over shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT or ST in normal mode Operating Procedure This procedure selects RT mode Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press Input Type ing the cel Key Initial Setting Level 3 Use the Key to enter 169 the password Move to Ad vanced Function Advanced Function Setting Level It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by pressing the ce Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds Parameter Initialization
257. it 194 MV display 227 MV display selection 249 MV lower limit 193 MV monitor cooling 176 MV monitor heating 175 MV upper limit 193 number of multi SP uses 213 ON OFF counter reset 254 operation adjustment protect 160 parameter initialization 220 parameter mask enable 161 password to move to protect level 162 PF key protect 161 PF setting 247 PID ON OFF 204 process value 165 process value set point 165 program pattern 205 program start 171 proportional band 188 protocol setting 255 PV change color 230 PV decimal point display 250 PV rate of change calculation period 245 PV stable band 231 PV status display function 250 PV MV manual MV 197 PV SP display screen selection 249 RT 234 RUN STOP 172 scaling lower limit 202 scaling upper limit 202 selecting 17 send data wait time 255 set point during SP ramp 167 setting change protect 161 soak time 191 soak time remain 171 soak time unit 243 SP 0 186 SP 1 186 SP 2 186 SP 3 186 SP lower limit 203 SP ramp set value 193 SP ramp time unit 220 Index SP upper limit 203 ST self tuning 205 ST stable range 224 standard or heating cooling 204 standby sequence reset 221 SV status display function 251 temperature input shift 186 temperature unit 202 transfer output lower limit 212 transfer output type 210 transfer output upper limit 212 upper limit temperature input shift value 187 wait b
258. kage current Control output 1 voltage output for driving SSR and control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR are not isolated For the ESAN EN how ever the internal circuits are functionally isolated Long life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasionally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber As an addi tional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the ESON Long life Varistor relay output r i Inductive load Varistor 2 Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Voltage used Varistor voltage 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Control Output 2 e Outputs are sent from terminals 11 12 14 and 15 with the E5CN and from pins 14 and 15 with the ES5AN EN The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuit
259. larity of terminals 5 Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the ESCN E5AN or E5EN M3 5 width of 7 2 mm or less For open wired connections to the E5CN E5AN or E5EN use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG14 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm2 The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal Use the specified size of crimp terminals for the E5GN M3 0 width of 5 8 mm or less For open wired connections to the E5GN use stranded or solid copper wires with a gauge of AWG24 to AWG18 equal to a cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 8231 mm2 The stripping length for screw terminals is 6 to 8 mm The stripping length for screwless clamp terminals is 10 mm The stripping length for auxiliary output 2 is 6 mm Up to two wires of the same size and type or two crimp terminals can be connected to one terminal Do not connect more than two wires or more than two crimp terminals to the same terminal Ferrules for screwless clamp terminals must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 8 to 12 mm in length Ferrules for auxiliary output 2 must be 0 8 to 1 4 mm in diameter and the exposed conductor must be 6 mm in length 6 Do not wire the terminals which are not used 7 To avoid inductive noise keep the wiri
260. larm value lower limit 1 Can be set Alarm value 2 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set Alarm value 3 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 o x o my ro o 20 o E a E rr rep rn re er ee a o i bu P o 20 E Related Parameters See PF setting advanced function setting level Page 247 Monitor setting items 1 to 5 advanced function setting level Page 248 196 Manual Control Level Section 5 6 5 6 Manual Control Level The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode while the PV MV param eter is displayed The final MV used in automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode In manual mode the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s _ M Press the O Key for at least 1 s display will flash Press the Key Press the PF Key for y for at least 1 s See note at least 1 s or the O Key for at least 1 s See note Press the O Key for at least 3 s Manual Control Level Note When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M for a Controller that has a PF Key E5AN E
261. level 16 moving to 123 parameter operation list 294 manual setup 68 Memory Error error display 282 mode key 5 mounting 25 terminal cover ESAN ESEN 26 ESCN ESCN U 26 to panel ESAN ESEN 26 ESCN ESCN U 25 ESGN 27 multi SP 101 167 MV at PV error 137 233 MV at stop 136 233 N No 1 display 4 No 2 display 4 O ON OFF control 54 204 setting 61 one point shift 91 operation level 16 163 parameter operation list 288 operation adjustment protect 110 output functions assignments 56 output limits 136 output periods 206 output specifications setting 54 P panel cutout ESAN 24 ESCN ESCN U 24 ESEN 24 ESGN 25 parameter flow 305 parameter operation list 288 adjustment level 289 manual control level 294 operation level 288 parameter operation lists advanced function setting level 294 communications setting level 299 initial setting level 291 protect level 299 parameter structure 258 parameters additional PV display 226 adjustment level display 179 alarm 1 hysteresis 209 alarm 1 latch 227 alarm 1 OFF delay 232 alarm 1 ON delay 232 311 312 alarm 1 type 207 alarm 2 hysteresis 209 alarm 2 latch 227 alarm 2 OFF delay 232 alarm 2 ON delay 232 alarm 2 type 209 alarm 3 hysteresis 209 alarm 3 latch 227 alarm 3 OFF delay 232 alarm 3 ON delay 232 alarm 3 type 210 alarm SP selection 244 alarm value 1 172 alarm value
262. ling control the proportional band P for the cooling control output is calculated using the following formula to set the cooling coeffi cient Cooling control output side P Cooling coefficient x P proportional band e When the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter is set to ON the cooling coefficient is set automatically when AT is executed If there is strong non linear gain for the cooling characteristics however it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Con troller A Setting range Unit Defaut 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 4 Function Setting E Related Parameters See Proportional band adjustment level Page 188 Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment advanced function setting level Page 245 Fed Dead Band The control system must be set to heating cooling control This parameter sets the output dead band width for heating cooling control A negative setting sets an overlapping band e This parameter sets an area in which the control output is 0 centering around the set point for a heating cooling control e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting A oder soting ange Unt beta Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 199 9 to 999 9 C or F 4 Function tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog
263. llating waves If that occurs increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control 4 4 2 Settings To set heating cooling control set the Standard or Heating Cooling Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters Setting Heating Cooling Control Operating Procedure Standard or heating cooling Heating cooling Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation p Standard or level to the initial setting level 71 7 FIL Heating S ra n 1 Cooling On L IF 2 Select heating cooling control in the initial setting level SENd Standard control H Heating cooling control Setting the Cooling Coefficient Operating Procedure Cooling Coefficient 10 Adjustment Level 1 Select the Cooling Coefficient parameter in the adjustment level Cooling Coefficient 2 Use the Al Key to set the parameter to 10 00 Setting the Dead Band Operating Procedure Dead Band 5 Adjustment Level 1 Select the Dead Band parameter in the adjustment level Dead Band 2 Use the Al Key to set the parameter to 5 0 98 Using Event Inputs 4 5 Using Event Inputs 4 5 1 Event Inp
264. log Inputs 4 2 1 Standby Sequence e The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then enters it again e For example with a lower limit alarm the process value will normally be below the set point i e within the alarm range when the power supply is turned ON causing an alarm to be output If the lower limit alarm with a standby sequence is selected an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value i e until it leaves the alarm range and then falls back below the alarm set value Restart e The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output It is how ever restarted later by the Standby Sequence Reset parameter advanced function setting level For details refer to the Standby Sequence Reset parameter in SECTION 5 Parameters 93 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs Section 4 3 4 2 2 Alarm Latch e The alarm latch can be used to keep the alarm output ON until the latch is canceled regardless of the temperature once the alarm output has turned ON Any of the following methods can be used to clear the alarm latch e Turn OFF the power supply The alarm latch is also cleared by switching to the initial setting level communications setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e Use the PF Key e Use an event input For details on setting the PF Key
265. low the decimal point Executing Heating Cooling Control Section 4 4 e The following figure shows a scaling example for a 4 to 20 mV input After scaling the humidity can be directly read Here one place below the decimal point is set Display humidity A Upper limit 95 0 Lower limit 10 0 gt Input mA 20 Operating Procedure In this example scaling is set to display 4 to 20 mA as 10 0 to 95 0 Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for three seconds to move from the operation level to mA Type the initial setting level Select Scaling Upper Limit parameter by pressing the kel Key TO O 39 2 Q Cc xe ne io 2 N 3 Use the A and Keys to set the parameter to 950 Scaling Lower 4 Select the Scaling Lower Limit parameter by pressing the cI Key 5 Press the A and Keys to set 100 p Point Select the Decimal Point parameter by pressing the ce Key 7 Press the A and Keys to set 1 8 To return to the operation level press the O Key for one second D
266. lower limit 122 Performing Manual Control Section 4 13 Manual MV Limit When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON enabled the MV Enable limits will function and the setting range for the Manual MV parameter will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit When the parameter is set to OFF disabled MV limits will not function Setting range Dora Manual MV Limit OFF Disabled ON Enabled ON Enable Moving from the e When the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds in the operation level s Operation Level to the auto manual switching display the manual mode will be entered and the Manual Control Level manual control level will be displayed It is not possible to move to any dis plays except for the PV MV parameter during manual operation Press the O Key for at least one second from the PV MV parameter display in man ual control level to return to automatic mode and display the top parame ter in the operation level Operation Level a fi spa ca ea ah at a PEE E EE E eee a cach os Cae ayaa aa Press O key for at least 1 s Manual Control Level xl o _O_LM Pa E TH s o0 i OEA 1 1 Press O key for at least 1 1 Auto Manual Switch
267. lue is 0 0 the heater overcurrent alarm is turned ON A Sening range Unt Default Function Setting E Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater overcurrent use Heater overcurrent latch Heater overcurrent hystere sis advanced function setting level Page 222 181 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs Cte Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF or Heater Overcur rent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value e Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less E Function Monitor range Unt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 2 value monitor will flash Monitor E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183
268. lure B CMWE Communications ji E m C P Multi SP zc p 17 Alarm Value z vo Ba see WS 2a Trout Stat Value least3s B SP Set Point Setting EAL e eter Limi Ge 1 H SP Upper Limit oO pes 1900 c c pe aun B E Heater Current 1 Proportional Band Er Set Point Di a g ce Limit the set point EN LE Value Monitor Pi EOP MSB Ramp BAL e Melua SP Lower Limit e 00 1 Bo m o 5 cal ca A T ce 2 ka ce 3 B Hb Heater Burnout Integral Time Is ry Heater Current 1 Value Bro E E T Derestoni 3 E Er Monitor FALCH O2 PID ON OFF B o o0 m 5 J PID settings Le E of Heater Overcurrent Derivative Time Bo Heater Current 2 Value g p 3 Alarm Value 3 BO petection 1 B CEC Monitor BAL ei filowertimit2 3 Standard or Bsa 500 e An mo o Heating Cooling t ca A N ce ice A E rp 3 Heater Current 2 Cooling Coefficient n ETE S E CEC Vaiue Monitor B LER teakage Currents aE ST Self tuning oo 00 g S A g For input type of t ce Heating cooling cal T ce A ETAS stand z g rd control or PID B Hb Heater Burnout Dead Band By r pajLeakage Current 2 BA JH Alarm Value ea i Ea ppl Dotection2 E LERE IMonitor E ALIH Upper Limit 3 z Program Pattern Oo B 00 o 2 5 z When assigning PID or 12 Ne eee Ya ke EP control output to ON OFF Bo Heater Overcurrent Fy Pi g p 7 Alarm Value z output a E Peleton e a gt 7 ta control Bes RSE es E CP lGontrol pened Heating 2 Va 20 ETP Leaka
269. makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 32 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 E5GN The E5O0N OCOTO is set for a K thermocouple input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is used an input error 5 ERR will occur Check the setting of the input type parameter Sara j B AC 1 Control output 1 j A ere fT 3 DO NOT mA DO NOT Relay output RS 485 communications Y USE H 1 TA ies VAC Fs ou SD RD SG v Analog input resistive loa i ee V Voltage output RS 232C communications L DO NOT z l for driving SSR i DONOF Senssann amaes a VDC 21 aA CTinput T USE corrent ouput A 4P 4E Universal TC Pt input 4 to 20 mA DC Event input EVI Ev2 poor _ Load 500 Q max ak Y Auxiliary N outputs cane sbo 6 6 6 4 250 VAC 2A i resistive load Auxiliary input power Control Auxiliary output 2 supply output1 T output 1 Note The terminals for auxiliary output 2 are 100 to 240 VA on the bottom of the case The yt ees ie polarity A heater burnout alarm heater short alarm mounting screws are on the sides of the heater overcurr
270. me i ime Power ON Power ON e Execution of auto tuning starts after the end of the SP ramp e When control is stopped or an error occurs the SP ramp function is dis abled 107 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4 8 Alarms during SP The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether Ramp Operation alarms are set to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point refer to the following diagrams The set point to be used is set in the Alarm SP Selection parameter Refer to page 244 Alarm SP Selection Ramp SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature friar output ON Time Alarm SP Selection Target SP Alarm Type 1 Upper Lower Limits Temperature f alarm output ON Time 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level To move to the advanced function setting level you must first cancel the pro tection applied by the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter In the default setting the advanced function setting level is protected and you cannot move to this setting level 1 2 3 1 Protect Level 2 Operation Adjust ment Protect Communica tions Protect 108 Initial Setting 3 Press the O and cel Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in op eration
271. min EU h MV Upper Limit aL H MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 105 0 standard 0 0 to 105 0 heating cooling MV Lower Limit aint 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 5 0 stan standard dard 105 0 to 0 0 heating cool 105 0 ing heating cooling MV Change Rate ofl 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 ls Limit 0 0 MV Change Rate Limit Disabled Extraction of Square SHRP 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Root Low cut Point 290 Initial Setting Level Parameters Input Type Characters Setting monitor value Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 JPt100 JPt100 OO SLO PONTO i oO h h d d d d d oe OOOO OU 2 WHDZCCOHMAACCARA 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 160 to 260 C 0 to 50 mV 24 W 25 PLII NNNMD UN 0O Display Default Appendix Set value 0 4to 20 mA 1 Oto20mA 2 1to5V 3 Oto5V 4 Oto10V Scaling Upper Limit Scaling lower limit 1 to 9 999 Scaling Lower Limit 1 999 to scaling upper limit Decimal Point Universal input 0 to 1 Analog input 0 to 3 Temperature Unit C F SP Upper Limit SP lower limit 1 input range lower limit tempera ture SP lower limit 1 scaling upper limit analog SP Lower Limit Input range lower limit to SP upper limit 1 temperature Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit 1 analog 0 PID ON OFF ON OFF 2 PID ON OFF None Standard or Heati
272. mperature unit at No 1 display mt YY JAI SAL IAL IAN WW Wt it it WAN JAN A IAN on Ooo 00 0000 Operation indicators Function Key Auto Manual Key l a A Mode Key Names of Parts E5EN E5GN Section 1 1 MIAN Ph coy ll Wi WMA Wh J No 1 display omrRon E5GN Temperature unit indicators HA E MDA ee eeo m ANININ BRER Level Key D D No 2 display ps J e AT J Mode Key Up Key Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 2 Explanation of Indicators No 1 Display No 2 Display No 3 Display E5AN EN Only Operation Indicators 1 2 3 Temperature Unit Displays the process value or parameter name Lights for approximately one second during startup Displays the set point parameter operation read value or the variable input value Lights for approximately one second during startup The set point will flash during autotuning Displays MV soak time remaining or multi SP Lights for approximately one second during startup A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized 1 SUB1 Sub 1 Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment param eter is ON SUB2 Sub 2 Lig
273. n pene Input Type level to the initial setting level PID ON OFF 2 Select the PID ON OFF parameter by pressing the kel Key 139 Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4 18 Operation Level Adjustment Level 140 PID ON OFF PV SP MV Change Rate Limit MV Change Rate Limit PV SF 3 Use the Al Key to select 2 PID control Press the ce Key to select the ST parameter Press the Key to select OFF Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Press the ce Key to select the MV Change Rate Limit parameter Use the Al Key to set the parameter to 5 0 Press the O Key to return to the operation level Setting the PF Key Section 4 19 4 19 Setting the PF Key 4 19 1 PF Setting
274. n of EV1 and EV2 Operation EV1 and EV2 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 1 and 2 parameters Not displayed Operation per Displayed Event input 2 not formed with two Multi SP used as multi SP switch points EV1 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV2 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 99 Using Event Inputs Models with Two Event Inputs 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Displayed Multi SP not used Number of Multi SP Uses Number of Multi SP Uses 100 Section 4 5 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation per formed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event input 4 not used as multi SP switch EV3 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points Models with Four Event Inputs 1 to 4 Displaye
275. n the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1 mA Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 267 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Section 6 6 7 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left TER The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete Press the A Key The No 2 display changes to 4 5 Release the key and wait two seconds or press the c Key This stores the temporarily regis tered calibration data to EEPROM To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE PROM press the ce Key while Na is displayed in the No 2 display with out pressing the Al Key 8 The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF 6 6 2 Calibrating a Voltage Input In this example calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Input with a voltage input set as the input type 1 2 3 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect an STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals as shown in the following diagram E5AN EN Input p
276. nced Function Setting Level E3 Heater EH Overcurrent 247 Hysteresis Alarm 1 Latch 227 BONE 220 su HS Alarm Use 235 aFF Initialization Alarm 2 Latch nn HS Alarm Latch E PF PF Setting 247 E A M ij SP Ramp Time 220 Alarm 3 Latch 227 HS Alarm E PFd i Monitor Setting 248 pa _ Unit Hysteresis p Item 1 cel B g Standby i E Monitor Setting ES ESE SENINE 221 Move ip Proteci 228 rpa Detection 236 Tae hae 248 Reset cel cel B Sb IN Auxiliary Output Input Error LBA Level B PE 43 Monitor Setting nae 1 Open in Alarm 222 EFF Output 228 23T B a Item3 B PF gy Monitor Setting Es g Item 4 248 Cold Junction ay Compensation 229 Method MB Command Logic Switching SBEN Auxiliary Output 222 LBA Band N a 2 Open in Alarm 237 q Control Output 1 238 E Sb 4N Auxiliary Output 2092 Assignment PF 5 Monitor Setting se N a 3 Open in Alarm on 248 tem 5 N N o
277. nd electrical life expectancy If an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become welded or burned Replace the Temperature Controller and all other Temperature Con trollers purchased in the same time period Note The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the ESCN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN 285 Appendix Symptom Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error Occurs Meaning Countermeasures The communications wiring is not correct Correct the wiring The communications line has become dis connected Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws The communications cable is broken Replace the cable The communications cable is too long The total cable length is 500 m maximum for RS 485 and 15 m maximum for RS 232C communications To extend the communications distance for RS 232C communications use OMROM s Z3R Optical Interface The wrong communications cable has been used E5CN E5EN or E5AN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG14 cross sec tional area of 0 205 to 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for the communica tions cable E5GN Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 cross sectional area of 0 205 to 0 823 mm twisted pair cable for the communications cable More than the specified number of communi cations devices are connected to the same communications path for RS
278. ndard control 5 0 to 105 0 See note Heating cooling control 105 0 to 105 0 See note Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling initial setting level Page 204 198 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 5 7 Initial Setting Level This level is used to set up the basic Temperature Controller specifications In this level you can set the Input Type parameter to set the sensor input to be connected limit the setting range of set points set the alarm modes and per form other operations Operation Level Press the C Press the O Key for at least 3 s Control stops Control in progress a Control stopped To move from the operation level to the initial setting level press the O Key for at least three seconds with any parameter displayed except for the Auto Manual Switch parameter e The initial setting level is not displayed when the Initial Setting Communi cations Protect parameter is set to 2 It can be used when the Initial Set ting Communications Protect parameter is set to 0 or 1 If the Input Type parameter is set for an analog input the following param eters will be set Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit and Decimal point Press the O Key for at least 1 s Initial Setting Level 199 Initial Se
279. nductor for E R S B W and PLII thermocouples and for an infrared temperature sensor 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed 5 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows Input types 5 7 11 12 15 Set to 54 mV ae ETE ETET Input types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 nput types 6 8 9 10 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 Set to 24 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 6 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 6 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration se
280. ng Cooling Standard or heating cooling Standard None ST OFF ON OFF aN ON None Program Pattern FERN OFF STOP CONT aF F StaP Cont None Control Period Heating 0 5 or 1 to 99 5 ito 99 Second Control Period Cool ing 0 5 or 1 to 99 5 ito 99 Second 291 Parameters Direct Reverse Operation Characters Setting monitor value Reverse operation direct operation Display a F or d Default Reverse operation Appendix Set value Alarm 1Type 0 Alarm function OFF 1 Upper and lower limit alarm 2 Upper limit alarm 3 Lower limit alarm 4 Upper and lower limit range alarm Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm 13 PV change rate alarm 11 2 Alarm 1 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 FS Alarm 2 Type Same settings as the alarm 1 type Note The 12 LBA Loop Burnout Alarm setting cannot be used None Alarm 2 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog inp
281. ng Level Section 5 8 m Function a Setting See Heater Burnout Latch Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON e When this parameter is set to ON the heater burnout alarm is held until either of the following conditions is satisfied a Heater burnout detection is set to 0 0 A b The power is cycled c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key PF Setting LAT Alarm Latch Cancel d The latch is cancelled by an event input Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 LAT Alarm Latch Cancel e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Setting range Default aN Enabled af F Disabled E Related Parameters Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level HbH Function m Setting See Heater Burnout Hysteresis The Heater Burnout parameter must be set to ON The Heater Burnout Latch parameter must be set to OFF Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned e This parameter sets hysteresis for heater burnout detection Setting range Unt Default E Related Parameters
282. ng direction Precaution If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is set outputs set for the PV change rate alarm function may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time It is therefore recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with the alarm latch turned ON PV Time Alarm value N PV change width for PV rate of change calculation period ON OFF OFF Alarm function Senna range Unt Derat PV Rate of Change Calcu 1 to 999 Sampling cycle 1s lation Period Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 3 10 1 Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations Control output heating status Conirol output Operation heating indicator Lit e Heater burnout detection and heater overcurrent detection are executed by measuring heater current while the control output heating is ON and heater short detection is executed by measuring heater current while it is OFF For details refer to the following table Heater burnout detection heater short detection and heater overcurrent detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Power to heater HB alarm HS alarm Heater overcurrent output output alarm output Yes Normal See note 1 No Heater burnout Not lit Yes HS alarm No Normal See note 2 Li
283. ng for the Digital Temperature Controller s terminal block away from power cables carry high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the temperature controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge 8 Use this product within the rated load and power supply 9 Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact If the voltage is applied gradually the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur xii 10 Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display 11 When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digit
284. ng when closing and opening the circuit HB HS and Heater Overcurrent Alarms for ESCN AN EN GN Controllers with Heater Burnout HS and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Max heater current 50 AAC Input current readout accuracy 5 FS 1 digit max Heater burnout alarm setting 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units range 0 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns OFF 50 0 A Heater burnout alarm output turns ON Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 HS alarm setting range 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units 0 0 A HS alarm output turns ON 50 0 A HS alarm output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms See note 2 Heater overcurrent alarm setting 0 1 to 49 9 A 0 1 A units range OA Heater overcurrent alarm output turns ON 50 0 A Heater overcurrent alarm output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms Note 1 When the control output 1 ON time is less than 100 ms heater burnout detection heater overcurrent detection and heater current measurement are not performed 2 When the control output 1 OFF time is less than 100 ms HS alarm and leakage current measure ment are not performed External Power Supply for ES1B Output voltage 12 VDC 10 Output current 20 mA max Note Contact your OMRON representative for information on using the external power supply for ES1B for other applications 276 Appendix Characteristics Indication accuracy ambient temperature of 23 C Thermocouple See not
285. nitoring SP ramp operation The SP ramp function operates in the same way when switching the set point using the multi SP function Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Parameters Operation at Startup Parameter level MV Upper Limit Adjustment level MV Lower Limit Adjustment level Set Point Upper Limit Initial setting level Set Point Lower Limit Initial setting level SP Ramp Set Value Adjustment level SP Ramp Time Unit Advanced function setting level Alarm SP Selection Advanced function setting level Section 4 7 Description To limit the manipulated variable To limit the manipulated variable To limit the SP setting To limit the SP setting To limit the SP rate of change Unit for setting the SP Alarm SP selection Restrictions during SP Ramp Operation If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or when switching from STOP to RUN mode the process value reaches the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when the set point is changed In this case operation is carried out with the process value treated as the set point before the change was made The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point PV lt SP PV gt SP SP SP A A SP ramp SP ramp Set point 5 Py Same rate of change Set point l gt nE l gt Ti A gt Ti
286. nits of 0 01 FS Integral time I 0 to 3 999 s in units of 1 s Derivative time D 0 to 3 999 s in units of 1 s When RT is ON 0 0 to 999 9 in units of 0 1 s Control Period 0 5 1 to 99 s in units of 1 s Manual reset value 0 0 to 100 0 in units of 0 1 Alarm setting range 1 999 to 9 999 decimal point position depends on input type Sampling period 250 ms Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 VDC Dielectric strength 2 300 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction vibration 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 10 min each in X Y and Z directions Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 2 hr each in X Y and Z directions Malfunction shock 100 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance 300 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Weight E5CN Approx 150 g Adapter approx 10 g Terminal cover approx 10 g E5CN U Approx 110g ca E5AN Approx 310 g Adapter approx 100 g Terminal cover approx 1 6 g E5EN Approx 260 g per cover E5GN Approx 90 g Adapter approx 10 g Degree of E5CN protection E5AN E5EN E5GN Front panel IP66 Rear case IP20 Terminals IP00 E5CN U Front panel IP50 rear case IP20 terminals IP00 Memory protection EEPROM non volatile memory number of writes 1 000 000 277 App
287. nput 1 or 2 OFF Event input 1 or 2 ON Cancelled Parameter level Description Event Input Assignment 1 Initial setting level Function of Event Input Assignment 2 Initial setting level i input func Number of Multi SP Uses Initial setting level 4 6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 4 6 1 Set Point Limiter 104 The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limiter This func tion can be used to prevent setting incorrect process values The set point lim iter is used to prevent the control target from reaching abnormal temperatures If the set point is not within the range set for the set point limiter as the result of changes to the Set Point Upper Limit or Set Point Lower Limit parameter the set point will automatically be change to a value within the set Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values Section 4 6 range The upper and lower limit values of the set point limiter are set using the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level When the set point limiter is reset the set point is forcibly changed to the upper or lower limit value of the set point limiter if the set point is out of the limiter range Also when the input type and the temperature unit scaling upper limit value or lower limit value are changed the set point limiter is forcibly reset to the input setting range or the scaling upper or lower limit value Input setting r
288. nt input data Communications Write Enable Disable cannot be assigned to an event input 13 Changing Control Output and Auxiliary Output Settings Control output and auxiliary output assignments can be changed The items that can be changed depend on the Controller model For details re fer to 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions Assigning a work bit to either a control output or to an auxiliary output is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned 14 Displaying Parameter Guides A description of the parameters can be displayed 15 Displaying the Work Bit Use Destinations Display a list of destinations where the work bits are used This procedure uses event input 2 to change to RUN or STOP Event input 2 ON RUN Event input 2 OFF STOP 153 Logic Operations Section 4 22 Event 2 Always OFF Always OFF Always OFF CX Thermo Untitled p 1 r File Edt View Communications TrendMontor Options Help D a H E ViewMode Advanced Level er amp C fe fe P ChannelName Channel 1 CH Channel name CH1 Channel 1 Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor i Start Setting Range ESAN RY3BT N Edt Form Control in Progress Parameters C Protect Level E Operation Level C Adjustment Level Manual Control Level Chose K
289. ntrol periods and other settings is done using parameter displays The O and ce Keys are used to switch between parameters and the amount of time that you press the keys determines which parameter you move to This section describes two typical examples Changing Parameters So A image means that there are parameters B aye ae A BLEN E 1 Continue pressing the cel key to change parameters Bes uy pH until you reach the intended parameter cel ENL a a Changing Numbers E CNE H BS g N i d i 5 h NEL ETNE in Eas anaf bes sue umeric data and selections in eac screen can be changed by using the Al and M4 keys Example 1 Input type 5 K thermocouple Setup Procedure o7 o 200 C to 1 300 C Power ON Power ON Control method ON OFF control a Alarm type 2 upper limit An BERR Operation Alarm value 1 20 C deviation error will be pA Set point 100 C displayed if E AG pwsp i the power Be E supply is omo turned ON z j before the Press the O key for Initial Setting at least 3 s Level SeNSONS Control stops connected Initial Setting Level Set input heck i JB ZM Lh Input Type 5 specifications Check Iput type
290. nts an upper limit temperature and a lower limit temperature as opposed to the Temperature Input Shift parameter which shifts the input temperature by set ting the shift for only one point A 2 point shift enables more accurate offset of the input range compared with a 1 point shift if the input shift values at the upper and lower limits differ This parameter sets input shift values for the upper and lower limits 2 point l shift of the input range Function Sening range Unt Default N 9109909 Corr J00 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 Input shift type advanced function setting level Page 233 187 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Proportional Band The control must be set to 2 PID control Integral Time Derivative Time arci These parameters set PID control constants PID constants are automatically set when AT or ST is executed control error action Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time integral of en P action Refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviation Function the deviation With proportional control there is normally an offset control error Proportional action is thus used in combination with integral action As time passes this control error disappears and the control temperature process value comes to agree with the set point D action Refe
291. o Event Inputs 3 and 4 Event input assignment 3 Event input assignment 4 Displayed Multi SP not used Section 5 7 Description of EV3 and EV4 operation EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 3 and 4 parameters Not displayed Operation per formed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event input 4 not used as multi SP switch EV3 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Event Input Assignment 4 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV3 and EV4 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 3 and 4 and selected set points Number of Multi SP Even input 3 Selected set point Uses 1 Set point 0 OFF ON Number of Multi SP Set point 1 Uses 2 OFF OFF Set point 0 ON OFF Set point 1 OFF ON Set point 2 ON ON Set point 3 Models with Four Event Inputs 1 to 4 Event input Event input Event input i assignment 1 assignment 2 assignment 3 assignment 4 Displayed Multi SP not used Event input Description of EV1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 operation EV1 EV2 EV3 and EV4 will perform the operation com mand assigned using the Ev
292. oFF aN None Automatic Display Return Time OFF or 1 to 99 oFF ito 99 Second Alarm 1 Latch OFF ON OFF aN None Alarm 2 Latch OFF ON OFF aN None Alarm 3 Latch OFF ON oFF aN None Move to Protect Level Time 1 to 30 Second Input Error Output 294 OFF ON oFF aN None Parameters Cold junction Com pensation Method Characters Setting monitor value OFF ON Display oFF oN Default Appendix Set value MB Command Logic Switching OFF ON oFF oN PV Change Color Orange Red Green Red to Green When ALM1 is lit Green to Red When ALM1 is lit Red to Green to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Red Green to Orange to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Green Red Orange to Green to Red Within PV stable band Green Outside stable band Green Red aft Fed LRN R PV Stable Band Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 FS Alarm 1 ON Delay A ian 0 to 999 0 ON delay dis abled Second Alarm 2 ON Delay Adan 0 to 999 0 ON delay dis abled Second Alarm 3 ON Delay Adon 0 to 999 0 ON delay dis abled Second Alarm 1 OFF Delay A iar 0 to 999 0 OFF delay dis abled Second Alarm 2 OFF Delay Adar 0 to 999 0 OFF delay dis
293. oad electrical durability 100 000 operations Long life relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 1 000 000 using a triac operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Current DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 600 Q max Resolution Approx 10 000 37 Wiring Terminals 38 Section 2 2 E5AN EN Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC 5 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 40 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Current DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 600 Q max Resolution Approx 10 000 E5GN Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC 2 A resistive load electrical durability 100 000 operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Current DC 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA resistive load 500 Q max Resolution Approx 10 000 Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected The voltage output for driving SSR is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits When using a grounding thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground If a control output termi nal is connected to the ground errors will occur in the measured tempera ture as a result of lea
294. oak time remain are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Soak time remain is displayed Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 E MV display selection advanced function setting level Page 249 The No 3 display must be supported E5AN EN Heating and cooling control must be adSl MV Display Selection a Function A Setting The PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter must be set to 1 2 4 or 6 or the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameter must be set to 2 e This parameter selects the MV display for PV SP MV during heating and cooling control Either heating MV or cooling MV can be selected C Soning rangs Doam a MV heating L a MV cooling 249 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 dP PV Decimal Point Display a The display below the decimal point in the PV can be hidden for temperature er inputs e The PV decimals below the decimal point can be hidden by setting the PV Function Decimal Point Display parameter to OFF When this parameter is set to ON the display below the decimal point will appear according to the input type setting Setting range O oN ON of F OFF zZ Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level P
295. ogram start See note 1 Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Cancel 40 AT Execute Cancel See note 2 Setting Change Enable Disable Alarm Latch Cancel Note 1 PRST Program Start can be set even when the Program Pattern param eter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 2 This function can be set for heating cooling control but the function will be disabled e When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assignment parameter STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual Switch PRST Program Start DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute Cancel AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable or LAT Alarm Latch Cancel Note Event inputs can be used on the E5CN OMO with an E53 CNOBON2 or E5AN EN LIML N with an E53 AKB Controllers Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied Event input ON OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer E Related Parameter See SPO to SP3 adjustment level Page 186 Event input assignment 1 and 2 Page 216 initial setting level Multi SP use Page 220 advanced function setting level 215 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Ey An event input must be assigned Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 HEEP mie tdt be ikai e The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 and 2 RUN STO
296. oise Operation Control output and alarm output turn OFF Memory Error Meaning Internal memory operation is in error Action First turn the power OFF then back ON again If the display remains the same the Controller must be repaired If the display is restored then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system Check for electrical noise Operation at Error Control output and alarm output turn OFF Current output is approx 0 mA Current Value Exceeds 282 Appendix Meaning This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55 0 A Action Control continues allowing normal operation An error message is displayed when the following items are dis played Heater current 1 value monitor Heater current 2 value monitor Leakage current 1 monitor Leakage current 2 monitor Heater Burnout HS Alarm Heater Overcurrent Meaning When heater burnout HS alarm or heater overcurrent occurs the No 1 display in the applicable setting level flashes Action When a heater burnout HS error or heater overcurrent is detected the HA indicator lights and the No 1 dis play flashes for the applicable Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Leakage Cur rent 1 Monitor or Leakage current 2 Monitor parameters in the operation level and adjustment level Control continues allowing normal operation 283 Appendix
297. ol In addi tion to AT auto tuning communications write enable disable switching hysteresis settings multi SP settings and input offset parameters it includes HB alarm HS alarm OC alarm and PID constants From the adjustment level it is possible to move to the top parameter of the initial setting level protect level or operation level Monitor Setting Item Level To switch to the monitor setting item level press the PF Key from the operation level or adjustment level The contents set for monitor setting items 1 to 5 can be displayed You can move from the monitor setting item level to the operation level or initial setting level This level is supported by the E5AN and E5EN only Manual Control Level When the O Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds from the operation level s auto manual switching display the manual control level will be dis played The MANU indicator will light When the PF Setting is set to A M auto manual and the PF Key is pressed for more than one second from the operation level or adjustment level the manual control level will be displayed E5AN and E5EN only This is the level for changing the MV in manual mode To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second It is also possible to return to the operation level by pressing the PF Key for more than one second when the PF Setting is set to A M 16 Setting Level Configuration and Key Opera
298. olated Long life relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasionally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire 39 Wiring Terminals Auxiliary Outputs 1 2 and 3 40 Section 2 2 e Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber As an addi tional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the ESON Long life Varistor relay output T Inductive Varistor 2 Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Voltage used Varistor voltage 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V On the E5CN 02 auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 6 and 8 On the E5CN O0O1000U auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across ter minals 7 and 8 On the E5CN O2000U auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across ter minals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output acros
299. one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2008 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Terms and Conditions Agreement Warranty Limitations of Liability Warranties Exclusive Warranty Limitations Buyer Remedy Limitation on Liability Etc Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES
300. ontrol and alarm status specified for the SV status display function are alternately displayed in 0 5 s cycles Set value Symbol OFF oFF Function No SV status display Manual MAN MANU is alternately displayed during manual control Stop STOP is alternately displayed while oper ation is stopped Alarm 1 ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status Alarm 2 ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status Alarm 3 ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status Alarm 1 to 3 OR status ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON Heater Alarm See note The default is OFF HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater over current alarm is ON HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection but the function will be disabled Example When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function Normal When ALM1 Is ON er er he ae G 4 alternating Pv SP 2 pom display Bes 0g SeoAnLM lt p 170 Logic Operations Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level
301. ooling parameter cannot be used e When the heating control output is a current output the Control Period Heating parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling The Control Period Heating parameter is used for the heating control output and the Control Period Cooling parameter is used for the cooling control output Parameter name Setting range Unt Defaut C Control Period Heating 0 5 or 1 to 99 Second 20 Setting Control Period Cooling 0 5 or 1 to 99 Second 20 E Related Parameters See PID ON OFF initial setting level Page 204 oREY Direct Reverse Operation m Function O Setting 206 e Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value increases Alternatively reverse oper ation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when the process value decreases aF R Reverse operation af d Direct operation Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 ALEI Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 must be assigned e Select one of the following alarm 1 types l Deviation deviation range absolute value LBA or PV change rate alarm Function i Setting Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation Description of function When alarm value X When alarm value X is positive is negative Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm 0 1 See note Upper an
302. op Burnout Alarm LBA 8 Refer to PV Change Rate Alarm on page 72 e Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level The default is 2 Upper limit alarm E Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 Page 172 Alarm value upper limit 1 Alarm value lower limit 1 Page 174 operation level Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output 1 open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced function setting level Alarm 1 hys teresis Page 209 initial setting level 208 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 Function a Setting See Alarm 1 must be assigned Alarm 1 Hysteresis The alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned Alarm 2 Hysteresis The alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned Alarm 3 Hysteresis The alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 e These parameters set the hysteresis for alarms 1 2 and 3 Setting range Unt Default_ Model with thermocouple resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F tance thermometer universal See note input Model with analog Input 0 01 to 99 99 FS Note Set None as the unit for analog inputs E Related Parameters Alarm value 1 to 3 Page 173 Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 Alarm value lower limit 1 to 3 Page 174 operation level Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Pages 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset Page 22
303. operation It is OFF on models with linear inputs Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 3 Using the Keys This section describes the basic functions of the front panel keys PF Function Auto This is a function key When it is pressed for at least 1 second the function set Manual Key in the PF Setting parameter will operate E5AN EN Only Example When A M auto manual is selected in the PF Setting parameter initial value A M the key operates as an auto manual switch switching between Auto Mode and Manual Mode If the key is pressed for more than 1 second regardless of key release timing the mode will switch O Key Press this key to move between setting levels The setting level is selected in the following order operation level adjustment level initial setting level com munications setting level ce Key Press this key to change parameters within a setting level The parameters can be reversed by holding down the key moving one per second in reverse order Al Key Each press of this key increments the value displayed on the No 2 display or advances the setting Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation Key Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No 2 display or reverses the setting Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation O cel Keys Press these keys to change to the protect level For details on operations in
304. or Control output 2 must be supported Relay or voltage outputs for driving RAZM Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor SSR must be used The Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0 e This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 2 is f ter turned ON and OFF e This function is not displayed when the set value is 0 or when the control Function output is a linear output 0 to 9999 100 times Monitor Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 gt Function Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm oon enn anne OO ng Clay Or voltage Outputs Tor ariving Set Value SSR must be used e An ON OFF count alarm occurs when the ON OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter e It is possible to assign ON OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen This function is disabled when the set value is 0 Soning rangs Um D10 9999 Monitor E Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON OFF count monitor advanced function setting level San Page 252 RAD Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm Control output 2 must be supported gt Function m Monitor See Relay or voltage outputs for driving Set Value SSR must be used An ON OFF count alarm occurs when the ON OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter e It is possible to assign ON OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to h
305. or torn 20 21 lt 22 lt Service Life Use the Temperature Controller within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 If the Controller is installed inside a control board the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55 C including the temperature around the Controller The service life of electronic devices like Temperature Controllers is determined not only by the num ber of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components Compo nent service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature the shorter the service life and the lower the temperature the longer the service life Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller xiii When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease In such a case use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers When providing forced cooling however be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Ambient Noise To avoid inductive noise keep the wiring for the Digital Temperature Con
306. ore 1 Input shift value 1 Lower limit 0 ri gt Input 100 Operating Procedure In this example the input from a K sensor is shifted by 1 C using a 1 point input shift Operation Level Operation Level Adjustment Level 1 Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level Adjustment Level Display Temperature 2 Select the Temperature Input Shift parameter by pressing the ce Key Input Shift 3 Press the IA or Key to set 1 0 LINII Operation Level 4 To return to the operation level press the LO Key The process value is 1 C larger than before the shift was applied 89 Shifting Input Values Two point shift Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value Lower limit Input Shift Value Section 4 1 e Separate shift values can be set for the upper limit and lower limit of the sensor input range for an infrared sensor as well as for a thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer with the Input Shift Type parameter set to INS2 If different shift values are set for the upper limit and lower limit then the slope of the line will be different before and after applying the input shif
307. otect level restricts movement to the initial setting level communica tions setting level and advanced function setting level Communications setting level Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach Initial setting level Advanced function setting level Possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 160 Protect Level Section 5 2 The Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 WEPE Setting Change Protect parameters must not be set to set ting change enable disable This parameter specifies the range of data to be protected The shaded cell indicates the default E Change Setting Protect Changes to settings using key operations are restricted Function When enabling and disabling of setting changes by event inputs assignment 1 and 2 is selected this parameter is not displayed Setting range Default aN Enabled af F Disabled joN 4 Setting PSetvalue Descrip OOO oO O Settings can be changed using key operations Settings cannot be changed using key operations The protect level settings however can be changed e The all protect indication Or will light when setting is ON The Controller must have a PF Key PFPE PF Key Protect E5AN EN E PF Key Protect This parameter enables and disables PF Key operation E5AN EN only Function Setvalue ieescription l
308. other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel It can be done only by first turning OFF the power 3 From the manual control level key operations can be used to move to the operation level only 4 When the PF Setting parameter is set to A M for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN 5 When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key E5AN EN 305 Appendix Parameter Flow This section describes the parameters set in each level Pressing the Ice Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top parameter in that level Power ON Starting in manual mode Manual Control Level Press the O Key or the PF Key for at least 1s See note 1 Press the PF Key mode for at least 1 s See note 1 Starting in automatic PF Key See note 2 Press the O Key for at least 3 s PF Key See note 2 Other than the Auto Manual Switch display Press the Press the O Key less than 1 s O Key for at least 1 s
309. ove to the protect level can Press the LO Key for at least 1 s iti j Communica be adjusted by chang Control stops a Sae lt gt tions Setting ing the Move to nas Press the Level tect level time setting OJ Key for less than 1 s Refer to page 228 Input password while Amal is displayed Set value 169 Advanced Function Setting Level Input password Cc Control in progress C Control stopped Calibration Level See Not displayed for some models note 2 4 gt Level change Note 1 You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset 2 You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel from the calibration level You must turn OFF the power supply Press the O Key for at least 1 s 3 From the manual control level key operations can be used to move to the operation level only Control in progress Control stopped Protect level Can be set Operation level Can be set Adjustment level Can be set Manual control level Can be set Monitor setting item level Can be set Initial setting level Can be set 15 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1 3 Conirol in progress Control stopped Advanced function setting level Can be set Calibration level Can be set Communications setting level Can be set Of these levels the initi
310. ower supply 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed 5 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows e Input type 2 or 3 5 V e Input type 4 10 V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 268 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input Input type 2 or 3 Section 6 6 6 When the cel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Set the STV to 1 V Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the y Key to temporarily re
311. parameter by pressing the ce Key Password to Move to Protect Level 3 Press the O and IA Keys to set the parameter to 1234 To prevent setting the password incorrectly the A and O Keys or and O Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password Be careful not to forget it If you forget the password contact your OMRON sales representative Communications e The Write Variable operation command can be used via communications Operation Command to write the password to the Move to Protect Level parameter When the to Move to the Protect correct password is written the display will change to the Operation Level Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled Note 1 If the Write Variable operation command is used to write the wrong pass word to the Move to Protect Level parameter after the correct parameter has been written the Move to Protect Level parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation commands to write parameters in the protect level will result in operation errors 2 If a password is not set or if it is set to 0 the display will change to the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the p
312. parameter sets the transfer output type e The operation is shown in the following table m Transfer Output Destination Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output No Control output 1 e Relay output e Voltage output for driving SSR e Relay output No No e Voltage output for driving Relay output SSR Voltage output for driving SSR E Precision and User Calibration Pp Precision _User calibration Transfer output 0 3 FS Supported See note Simple transfer output 0 3 FS Not supported Note Refer to SECTION 6 CALIBRATION for details on the calibration procedure 210 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 A Transfer output type Default OFF a Setting Set point Set point during SP ramp PV MV monitor heating MV monitor cooling E Related Parameter See Transfer output upper limit Transfer output lower limit initial setting level a Page 212 211 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 LR H Transfer Output Upper Limit There must be a transfer output or a current output ER L Transfer Output Lower Limit The transfer output type must not be set to OFF Gas e This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of transfer outputs Function Transfer output Setting range Default type Transfer Transfer a output lower output upper limit limit Sett
313. peration of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees Operation Adjustment Level Level ress the LO Key less than 1 s Press the O kel keys display will flash Press the O ce Keys for at least 1 s Press the O ce Keys for at least 3 s See note Protect Level Control in Progress To move from the operation level to the protect level press LO and Ice Keys for three seconds see note or more Note The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the Move to Protect Level Time parameter setting Protect Level Move to Protect Level Displayed only when a password is set 20 0000 Operation Adjustment Protect 20 0000 Initial Setting Communications Protect O D000 E ol Jat Setting Change Protect 20 0000 PF Key Protect 00 0000 Parameter Mask Enable 00 0000 Password to Move to Protect Level 20 0000 Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their settings cannot be changed 159 Protect Level Section 5 2 4 Move to Protect Level The Password to Move to Protect Level password must not be set to 0 The password to move to the protect level is entered for this parameter e The password to move to the protect level i e the pas
314. peration is shown in the following table Conirol output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output destination Current output None relay output voltage Control output 1 output for driving SSR Relay output voltage out None relay output voltage None put for driving SSR output for driving SSR m Precision and User Calibration User calibration Simple transfer out Not specified Not supported put Transfer output type Setting range OFF See note 1 A Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit Set point during SP ramp SP lower limit to SP upper limit PV Input setting range lower limit to input set ting range upper limit or Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit MV monitor heating 5 0 to 105 0 heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 See note 2 MV monitor cooling 0 0 to 105 0 See note 2 1 The default is OFF 2 The output value will be different between when the Transfer Output Type parameter is set to MV monitor heating or MV monitor cooling and when the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter is set to a heating con trol output or cooling control output Example When a Current Output Is Set to 4 to 20 mA and MV Monitor Heating Is Selected When used as a transfer output 4 0 mA will be output for 0 and 20 0 mA will be output for 100 When used as a control output 3 7 mA will be output for 0 and 20 3 mA will be output for 100 so that the actuator is
315. plication example Red to Green Red Green To display the PV reached sig nal Green to Red Green Red To display error signals Linked to PV PV PV stable Stable stable band band band 1 4 Within High gt py A SP Within PV stable Application example band Red to Green to Green To display stable status Red Green to Orange To display stable status Orange to Red Orange to Green To display stable status Green to Red 113 PV Change Color PV Stable Band pis L PV Stable LI Band 4 10 2 Setting Setting the PV Change Color to Indicate Stable Status Operating Procedure Operation Level nitial Setting Level ENE _ nitial Setting Level 7 Move to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization PV Change Color 114 Section 4 10 When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected the PV display color will change according to whether the present value PV is lower than within or higher than the PV stable band shown in the following figure The PV stable band is set with the SP as the center as shown below PV stable PV stabl
316. plosive gas Otherwise minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur Never disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur CAUTION Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equip ment It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally b More than one disconnect switch may be required to de energize the equipment before servicing the product c Signal inputs are SELV limited energy 1 d Caution To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not inter connect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits 2 If the output relays are used past their life expectancy contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions 1 A SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation that does not exceed 30 V r m s and 42 4 V peak or 60 VDC 2 A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels A CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws to between 0 74 and 0 90 N m Loose sc
317. provided with the product and check the fol lowing points Timing Check point Details Purchasing the prod uct Product appearance After purchase check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control Product model and speci fications Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica tions Setting the Unit Product installation loca tion Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do not block the vents on the product Wiring Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress force when tightening them Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 74 to 0 90 N m see note Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the termi nal block and connectors Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits Operating environ ment Ambient temperature The ambient operating temperature for the product is 10 to 55 C with no condensation or icing To extend the service life of the product install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible In locations exposed to high temperatures if necessary cool the products using a fan or other cooling method Vibration and
318. put 0 to 50 mV I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 e Inputs with the following specifications can be connected for analog input i e E5 N OOOOL Current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage input 1 to 5 VDC 0 to5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC Control Outputs A control output can be a relay voltage for driving SSR or current out put depending on the model e Long life relay outputs see note use semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit thereby reducing chattering and arcing and improving durability However if high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals short circuit faults may occasion ally occur If the output becomes permanently shorted there is the danger of fire due to overheating of the heater Design safety into the system including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber As an additional safety measure provide error detection in the control loop Use the Loop Burnout Alarm LBA and HS alarm that are provided for the E5UN Long life Varistor relay output _ p4 _ 1 i inductive i N Varistor Q 2 Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions Voltage used Varistor voltage 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1 000 A min 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V e Always connect an AC load to
319. put is automatically initialized as shown below by changing the control mode Example E5CN Parameter name Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating cooling Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 A Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment heating heating heating heating Control Output 2 H Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Control output Assignment See note 1 See note 1 cooling Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Assignment See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Auxiliary Output 2 u Alarm 2 Control output Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment See note 3 cooling See note 3 56 Setting Output Specifications Section 3 5 Example E5GN Parameter name Standard Heating cooling Control Output 1 A Control output Control output Assignment heating heating Auxiliary Output 1 Alarm 1 Control output Assignment See note 2 cooling Auxiliary Output 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment Note 1 There is no control output 2 and no parameter assignment is displayed for that output 2 The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF 3 For the ESAN EN the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set as the control output for cooling The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param eter is set for alarm 2 E Ala
320. put it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Setting range Unt Default 09099 E oo Setting Function E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point A initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 1 type initial setting level Page 207 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 1 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 1 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level Operation Level Section 5 3 Alarm 2 must be assigned Al 2 Alarm Value 2 The alarm 2 type must not be 0 1 4 5 or 12 This parameter is set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list e This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 2 l e During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the cur rently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting Sening range Unt Default 09099 E oo Function Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point a initial setting level Page 202 initial setting level Alarm 2 type initial setting level Page 209 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output open in alarm Page 222 Alarm 2 hysteresis Page 209 Alarm 2 latch Page 227 advanced func tion setting level Alarm 3 must be assigned Al 4 Alarm Value 3 The alarm 3
321. r 100 AT The limit cycle timing varies according to whether the deviation DV at the start of auto tuning execution is less than 10 FS Deviation gt 10 FS Deviation lt 10 FS PV Limit Cycle MV Pv A Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40 SP q Deviation 10 FS A a AT started AT ended Time Amplitude 40 Deviation l i l 10 FS l E E a i Time AT started AT ended Lad 63 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 100 AT Operation will be as shown in the following diagram regardless of the devia tion DV at the start of AT execution To shorten the AT execution time select 100 AT PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 100 AT started AT ended Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled Operating Procedure This procedure executes 40 AT Adjustment Level 1 Press the lO Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level AT Execute Cancel 2 Press the lA Key to select At i The No 1 display for AT Execute Cancel will flash during AT execution 3 FF will be displayed when AT ends 4 To return to the operation level press the O Key PV 3 8 2 ST Self tuning ST self tuning is a function th
322. r by press ing the cel Key Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4 18 Extraction of 7 Use the A Key to set the parameter to 10 0 Square Root Low cut Point 8 Press the O Key to return to the operation level PV SP 4 18 Setting the Width of MV Variation MV Change Rate Limit MV Change Rate Limit Heating e The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowable width of change in the MV per second If the change in the MV exceeds this setting the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached This function is disabled when the setting is 0 0 e The MV change rate limit does not function in the following situations In manual mode e During ST execution Cannot be set when ST is ON e During AT execution e During ON OFF control e While stopped during MV at Stop output e During MV at PV Error output Setting rage MV Change Rate 0 0 to 100 0 oo Limit Operating Procedure This procedure sets the MV change rate limit to 5 0 s The related parame ters are as follows PID ON OFF PID ST OFF Operation Level nitial Setting Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operatio
323. r h Adjustment level Soak Time Unit m minutes h hours Advanced function set ting level Wait Band OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 C or F See notes 1 Adjustment level and 2 Soak Time Remain 0 to 9999 min or h Operation level Monitor Note 1 Set for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Univer sal Inputs Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 2 The setting unit of the Wait Band parameter is FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs and the setting range is OFF or 0 01 to 99 99 Program Pattern Either of two program patterns can be selected The simple program opera tion will not be performed if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF E Pattern 1 STOP Control will stop and the STOP mode will be entered when the program has ended SP Set point A i D RSET gt STRT 1 Soak time END display gt s END output Automatically switches from RUN to STOP mode E Pattern 2 CONT Control will continue in RUN mode when the program has ended SP Set point jo i e ry Ra STRT 4 Soak time s END display gt i END RUN mode continues output 130 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Starting Method Note Any of the following three methods can be used to start the simple program e Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT
324. r on the No 1 display flashes When AT ends the AT Execute Can cel parameter turns OFF and the No 1 display stops flashing AT Execute Cancel No 1 display 100 AT execution in progress If you move to the operation level during AT execution the No 2 display flashes to indicate that AT is being executed PV SP No 2 display AT execution in progress Only the Communications Writing RUN STOP AT Execution Cancel and Pro gram Start parameters can be changed during AT execution Other parame ters cannot be changed AT Calculated Gain The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are cal culated using AT When emphasizing response decrease the set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value AT Hysteresis The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis when switching ON and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto tuning Limit Cycle MV Amplitude The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto tuning Note This setting is disabled for 100 AT m 40 AT The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter but the AT execution time may be longer than fo
325. r the SYSWAY communications protocol Function e The MB command communications writing switch is the equivalent of the MB command remote local switch of the E5 e The setting indicated by the shaded cell indicates the default same logic a as E501 Text data of MB command Setting 0000 0001 Communications writing enabled Communications writing disabled remote mode selection local mode selection Communications writing disabled Communications writing enabled local mode selection remote mode selection Terms in parentheses are the terms used on the E5CJJ E Related Parameters See Communications writing adjustment level Page 180 Protocol setting communications setting level Page 255 229 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 CoLP PV Change Color Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display No 1 display There are three display colors orange red and green and you can select from the following three modes and eight types e Constant This mode displays orange red or green all the time e Linked to Alarm 1 This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON e Linked to PV stable band This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable b
326. r with a Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input Analog Input Q Input power supply L Input power supply L Input power supply LH Input power supply Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 Current Input for a Controller with an Analog Input r Input power supply Input power supply Input power supply bo Input power supply L ne Input power supply ee Input power supply i gt Input power supply i r Input power supply L Operation Set the STV output to the voltage or current equivalent to the check value 273 Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6 7 274 Appendix Specifications Ratings Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz _ 24 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110 of rated supply voltage Power consump E5CN 7 5 VA 5 VA 3 W tion E5CN U 6 VA 3 VA 2 W 4 VA 2 W for current output E5AN 10 VA 5 5 VA 4 W E5EN 10 VA 5 5 VA 4 W E5GN 5 5 VA 3 VA 2 W Sensor input See note 1 Temperature input type Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 Infrared temperature sensor 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Voltage input 0 to 50 mV Controllers with Analog Inputs See note 2 Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Input impedance 150 Q max Voltage input 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V Input impedan
327. ram The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error before it receives the response from the Controller Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response wait time in the host device The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error after broadcasting a command except for SYSWAY The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commands The host device sent another command before receiving a response from the Control ler The response must always be read after sending a command except for broadcast commands The host device sent the next command too soon after receiving a response from the Controller 286 After receiving a response wait at least 2 ms before sending the next command Appendix Meaning Countermeasures The communications line became unstable when Controller power was turned ON or interrupted and the host device read the unstable status as data Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller The communications data was corrupted from noise from the environment Try using a slower baud rate Separate the communications cable from the source of noise Use a shielded twisted pair cable for the communications cable Use as short a communications cable as possible and do not lay or loop extra cable To prevent indu
328. ram 4 Condition A h Condition B A E Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Page 207 to 209 Alarm 1 to 3 latch advanced function setting level Page 227 Setting 221 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Sh N m Function A Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm 1to 3 Auxiliary output 1 2 or 3 must be assigned e This parameter sets the output status of auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 e When Close in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is output unchanged When Open in Alarm is set the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output The following table shows the relationship between the auxiliary output function auxiliary output and operation displays SUB1 to SUB3 Auxiliary output function Auxiliary output Operation display SUB1 to SUB3 Close in Alarm Lit Setting Not lit Open in Alarm Lit Not lit Setingrane Defaut N a Close in alarm 4 Open in alarm N a E Related Parameters See Auxiliary output 1 to 3 assignment advanced function setting level Pages mn 240 to 242 Heater burnout HS alarms and Mbit HB ON OFF heater overcurrent detection must be Function A Setting supported Alarm 1 must be assigned e Set to use the heater burnout alarm Seiting range oN Enabled aF F Disabled Advanced Function Setti
329. rature input the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is dependent on the currently selected sensor and during analog input it is a on scaling Setting range range a OFF or 1 to 9999 EU s EU minute or Eye eine fr EU h Setting E Related Parameters See Input type Page 200 Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit Decimal point initial setting level Page 202 ST Page 205 initial setting level SP ramp time unit advanced function setting level Page 220 ol H MV Upper Limit The control must be set to 2 PID control ol k MV Lower Limit The ST parameter must be set to OFF e The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and lower limits of the manipulated variable When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value the upper or lower limit Function value will be the output level e MV Upper Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different A Control method Sening range Umt Dorat Standard MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 Heating cooling 0 0 to 105 0 Setting e MV Lower Limit The setting ranges during standard control and heating cooling control are different The manipulated variable for the cooling control output side during heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value Control method Setting range ri Default Standard 5 0 to MV upper limit 0 1 Heating cool
330. rcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less m Monitor range Unt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 1 value monitor will flash Monitor E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level 4 Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 Heater overcurrent use advanced function setting level Page 246 Error Displays L l Page 283 Operation Level Section 5 3 Heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent detection must be supported two CTs tte Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less m Monitor range Unt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output t
331. rent of 10 0 A or more Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout gt 2 5A When the difference is less than 2 5 A detection is unstable The setting range is 0 1 to 49 9 A Heater burnout HS and heater over current are not detected when the set value is 0 0 or 50 0 When the set value is 0 0 the heater burnout alarm is always OFF the HS alarm is always ON and the heater overcurrent alarm is always ON When the set value is 50 0 the heater burnout alarm is always ON the HS alarm is always OFF and the heater overcurrent alarm is always OFF Set the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or less When a current value of 55 0 A is exceeded FFFF is displayed in the Heater Current 1 or 2 Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 or 2 Moni tor parameters 3 10 4 Application Examples Single phase Heaters Example Using a 200 VAC 1 kW Heater Normal Burnout 5 A gt AC line AC line 200 V 200V Burnout Load such as a heater Product To CT input Product To CT input The heater power supply provides 5 A when the current is normal and 0 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current Heater burnout current 2 Heater burnout detection current 5 0 2 Example Using Three 200 VAC 1 kW Heaters 2 5 A Normal Burnout 15 A gt 10A 200 V Product To CT input Product To
332. ress the LO Key to move from the adjustment level to the operation level PV SP 134 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 4 15 3 Application Example Using a Simple Program The program will be started by changing the setting of the Program Start parameter The following example shows using a simple program with the pro gram pattern set to STOP Set point Se ee wi caa OR Soak time i i Soak time C rol lt lt SO 1 END display END output RUN STOP status i i Program start Timing Description The Program Start parameter was changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key operations The RUN STOP status automatically changes to RUN mode when the above operation is performed e The Program Start parameter was changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations before the soak time expired The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the above operation is performed The Program Start parameter is again changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key opera tions The RUN STOP status will automatically change to RUN mode when the above operation is performed The RUN STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when soak time expires END flashes on the No 2 display and the program END output turns ON e The
333. rews may occasionally result in fire 3 Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled If they are not suitable unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents A malfunction in the Temperature Controller may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs resulting in property damage To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Temperature Controller take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line A semiconductor is used in the output section of long life relays If excessive noise or surge is impressed on the output terminals a short circuit failure is likely to occur If the output remains shorted fire will occur due to overheating of the heater or other cause Take measures in the overall system to prevent excessive temper ature increase and to prevent fire from spreading When inserting the body of the Temperature Controller into the case confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case If the body of the Temperature Controller is not inserted properly faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or mal function 3 The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the E5CN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5G
334. rmometer set as the input type Use connecting wires of the same thickness 1 2 3 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box called a 6 dial in this manual to the platinum resistance thermometer input terminals as shown in the follow ing diagram Input power supply Ls Input power supply L Input power supply 3 Turn the power ON 4 Move to the calibration level This starts the 30 minute aging timer This timer provides an approximate timer for aging After 30 minutes have elapsed the No 2 display changes to 0 You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed 5 Execute calibration for the main input Press the ce Key to display the count value for each input type The No 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in hexadecimal Set the 6 dial as follows e Input type 0 390 Q e Input type 1 2 3 or 4 280 Q Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 264 Analog Input Calibration Thermocoupl
335. rms It will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned i e when an alarm must be set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Assignment parameters For example if alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarm 1 has been assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned Operating Procedure This procedure sets the following control and auxiliary output assignments Control output 1 Control output heating Control output 2 Control output cooling Auxiliary output 1 Alarm 1 Auxiliary output 2 Alarm 2 Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level gt itial Setting Level 2 Select the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter by pressing the ce Key Input Type nitial Setting Level m Standard or Heating Cooling nitial Setting Level 3 Press the A Key to set the parameter to H C Note The following output assignments do not need to be set be
336. rnately displayed while operation is stopped IM l AL i ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status AL Me ALM2 is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status AL M3 ALM3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status 1M L ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1 2 or 3 is set to ON HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is ON E Related Parameters Process value set point PV operation level Page 165 PV MV manual MV manual control level Page 197 d REF m Function m Monitor Display Refresh Period e This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values Only display refreshing is delayed and the refresh period for process values used in control is not changed e This function is disabled by setting the parameter to OFF soning range Wm OFF 0 25 0 5 1 0 251 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Control output 1 must be supported Relay or voltage outputs for driving RA IM Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor SSR must be used The Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0 e This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 1 is f ae turned ON and OFF e This function is not displayed when the set value is 0 or when the control Function output is a linear output 0 to 9999 100 times Monit
337. ro tection or those with IPL0 are not waterproof Front panel IP66 Rear case IP20 Terminal section IP00 E5CN U Front panel IP50 rear case IP20 terminals IP00 Precautions for Operation 1 w D It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Temperature Controllers into a control panel or similar device Make sure that the Temperature Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display When executing self tuning turn ON power for the load e g heater at the same time as or before supplying power to the Temperature Controller If power is turned ON for the Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load self tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved When starting operation after the Temperature Controller has warmed up turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load Instead of turning the Temperature Controller OFF and ON again switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio television set or wireless installing The Controller may cause radio disturbance for these devices Shipping Standards The E5CN E5CN H E5AN E5AN H E
338. rol is l aN Level running Sas RUN Stopped 5t5P ZETT 4 cal Set alarm value Use thelAland pr AL i M keys toset B MIL Alarm 30 he alarm value SS 30 Value 1 io 30 C Fa Start operation Start operation 51 Setting the Input Type Section 3 2 3 2 Setting the Input Type The Controller supports four input types platinum resistance thermometer thermocouple infrared temperature sensor and analog inputs Set the input type that matches the sensor that is used In the product specifications there are models with thermocouple resistance thermometer inputs universal inputs and models with analog input The settings differ depending on the model Check to make sure which model you are using 3 2 1 Input Type The following example shows how to set a K thermocouple for 20 0 to 500 0 C Operating Procedure Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Initial Setting Level 2 Press the Al Key to enter the set value of the desired sensor ETE Input Type When you use a K thermocouple 20 0 to 500 0 C enter 6 as the set value Hint The key operation is saved two seconds after the change or by press ENE ing the O or cel Key
339. rol output cooling side resistive load ty bonor Ponor A ame Mii te output mA USE 5 An input error is sent to the or driving SSR L sent to which the alarm 1 gt gt gt gt 12 VDC 21 mA gt y i lt function is assigned Current output DONOT gt gt gt 4 to 20 mA DC USE rf BI c Input power supply 0 to 20 mA DC i Load 600 Q max Analog input TC Pt 100 to 240 VAC lt universal input 24 VAC VDC no polarity Note For the Wiring Socket purchase the P2CF 11 or PG3A 11 separately Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied E5AN EN Controllers Option Units The E5O0N OOOTCO is set for a K thermocouple a omire ti n eg oe or a p input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is UMEA OnS l SI ONDE T ii used an input error 5 ERR will occur Check the l E53 EN01 E53 EN03 E53 AKB no polarity setting of
340. rs to a control action that is proportional to the time derivative of the control error The proportional control and integral control cor rect for errors in the control result and thus the control system is late in responding to sudden changes in temperature The derivative action increases the MV in proportion to the slope of the change in the temperature as a corrective action A Parameter Models Setting range Default name Setting Proportional Controllers with Thermocouple 0 1 to 999 9 C or F Band Resistance Thermometer Multi See note inputs 1 Controllers with Analog Inputs FS Integral Time 0 to 3999 Second Derivative Time RT is OFF O0to 3999 Second RT is ON 0 0 to 999 9 Second Note 1 Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs 2 If the settings for RT robust tuning are changed the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D will be initiated E Related Parameters See AT execute cancel adjustment level Page 179 188 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 r cr H ini The control must be heating cooling c 5L Cooling Coefficient control and 2 PID control If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to the cooling side e In heating coo
341. rs with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 20 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs Perform the following procedure to use the loop burnout alarm In this example the LBA detection time is set to 10 the LBA level is set to 8 0 and the LBA band is set to 3 0 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 2 Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the ce Key Loop Burnout Alarm Initial Setting Level 3 Move to Ad 4 vanced Function Parameter Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level 6 LBA Detection Time 7 8 9 10 11 Initial Setting Level 12 Input Type Operation Level 13 Section 4 12 Press the lA Key to set the parameter to 12 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key For details on moving
342. rse operation is used in a heating control system Direct operation is used in a cooling con trol system in which the operation is the opposite of a heating control sys tem The Control Output 1 Assignment is set to 4 control output heating for either direct or reverse operation e Direct reverse operation is set in the Direct Reverse Operation parameter in the initial setting level The default is af F reverse operation Operating Procedure In this example the input type temperature unit direct reverse operation and control period heat parameters are checked Input type 5 K thermocouple Temperature unit C Direct reverse operation af F reverse operation Control period heat 20 seconds Operation Level 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level itial Setting Level 2 The input type is displayed When the input type is being set for the first time 5 K thermocouple is set To select a different sensor press the A or Key 5 Input Type Temperature 3 Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the el Key The de Unit fault is C To select F F press the lAl Key 55 Setting Output Specification
343. running awsiliary output 1 outputs alarm 1 a ey ine ae aren 5 Auxiliary output 1 Work bit 1 con 155 Logic Operations Section 4 22 Logic Operation Editor E Import of Library Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation Type Operation Z Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work BiL gt Ioj x Close Work Bit 1 is used by Palen 1 E 7 ON OFF Delay H IN 1 1 Work Bit1 Input A Input B to ir ou Input C Input D nh 4 oo OB Time Unit Always OFF T O Always OFF hd an Z bawos w a Number of MuiSP Uses Control Output Assignment 1 25P z Control Output Control output heating E Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Control Output 2 No assignment B Event Input 1 Event input 1 estemaling z None z aR Event Input 2Event input 2 extemaling z RUN STOP Z Ausiiay Output amt z Event Input 3 Event input 3 extemal inp None z Auxiliary Output2 Alam 2 B Event Input 4 Event input 4 extemal ing z None z Auniiary Output3 Alam 3 z 156 4 Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box Click the Close Button This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX Thermo Transfer the settings to the Control ler to set the Controller Refer to CX Thermo help for the procedure to transfer th
344. s _Noltage for driving SSR Voltage for driving SSF for driving SSR Voltage for driving SSR __ Relay _ Voltage for driving SSF Voltage for driving SSR E5CN E5AN EN e The following table shows the specifications for each output type E5CN Output type Specifications Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion E5AN EN Output type Specifications Long life relay 250 VAC 3 A resistive load electrical durability 1 000 000 using a triac operations Voltage for driv PNP type 12 VDC 15 21 mA with short circuit protec ing SSR tion Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected The voltage output for driving SSR is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits Therefore when using a grounding thermocouple do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground If a control out put terminal is connected to the ground errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current With ESAN EN however con trol output 2 voltage output for driving SSR is functionally isolated from the internal circuits Control output 2 of the E5CN is a voltage output for driving SSR only and outputs across terminals 11 and 12 or 14 and 15 Control output 1 voltage output for driving SSR and control output 2 voltage output for driving SSR are not is
345. s Section 3 10 3 10 5 Settings HB Alarm To activate the heater burnout alarm set the HB ON OFF parameter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 and Heater Burnout Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter to 2 5 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The Heater Burnout Detection parameter setting is already ON by default so set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter Operation Level 1 Input Type 5 Moves to Ad vanced Function Setting Level Detection nitial Setting Level 2 itial Setting Level 3 Heater Burnout 4 Move to the advanced function setting level Press the LO Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Ad vanced Function Setting Level Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level The top p
346. s Section 3 5 Control Period 4 Select the Control Period Heating parameter by pressing the c Key Heating The default is 20 I 1 Direct Reverse 5 Select the Direct Reverse Operation parameter by pressing the kel Key TIT w Operation The default is of f reverse operation To select af d direct opera 1 tion press the lA Key 6 To return to the operation level press the O Key for at least one second PV SP Move to Ad 7 Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press vanced Function ing the cel Key Setting Level 3 5 3 Assigned Output Functions e Function assignments can be changed by changing the settings for con trol and auxiliary output assignments The default function assignments for each output are shown below Parameter name Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment Control output heating Control Output 2 Assignment Not assigned Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Alarm 3 E5AN EN only Im lm Lm Gael Be e Refer to pages 240 to 242 for the functions that can be assigned to the outputs e Each out
347. s for Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 3 0 to 15 Same as for Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 4 0 to 15 Same as for Monitor Setting Item 1 Monitor Setting Item 5 0 to 15 Same as for Monitor Setting Item 1 PV SP Display Screen Selection PV SP PV SP Multi SP PV SP MV PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP PV SP Multi SP PV SP MV PV SP Multi SP PV SP Soak Time Remain 6 PV SP MV PV SP Soak Time Remain 7 PV SP Soak Time Remain MV Display Selec tion O MV Heating C O MV Cooling PV Decimal Point Display OFF ON Oi Page an ay Oe or PV Status Display Function OFF OFF MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALN2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 ALM Alarm 1 to 3 OR status HA Heater alarm gt lt Di UW M n O E SV Status Display Function OFF OFF MANU Manual STOP Stop ALM1 Alarm 1 ALM2 Alarm 2 ALM3 Alarm 3 ALM Alarm 1 to 3 OR status HA Heater alarm Display Refresh Period OFF 0 25 0 5 1 0 Second Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor RAIM 0 to 9999 100 times Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor 298 RAEM 0 to 9999 100 times Parameters Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value Characters Setting monitor value 0 to 9999 Display Default 100 times Appendix Set value Control Output 2 ON OFF Count
348. s parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 2 Function A NaNE No function is assigned to control output 2 NoNE a Heating control output is output See note Setting L a Cooling control output is output See note 1 ALM i Alarm 1 is output ALM Alarm 2 is output ALMI Alarm 3 is output F ENd Program end is output See note 2 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm wR i Work bit 1 See note 4 Re Work bit 2 See note 4 WRI Work bit 3 See note 4 RY Work bit 4 See note 4 WS Work bit 5 See note 4 WRG Work bit 6 See note 4 NRT Work bit 7 See note 4 WA Work bit 8 See note 4 Note 1 If a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control control automatically switches to a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial setting level 239 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Function A Setting See 240 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Note Auxiliary output 1 must be assigned e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 1 Setting range Default
349. s setting level 17 255 parameter operation list 299 control outputs 13 control outputs 1 and 2 wiring 37 39 control periods 54 206 Controllers with Analog Input 267 Controllers with Analog Inputs 259 268 Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Input 258 265 cooling coefficient setting 98 current input calibration 267 current transformer calculating detection current 75 Current Transformers CT 74 279 CT inputs wiring 42 external dimensions 279 E54 CT1 279 E54 CT3 279 specifications 278 279 Current Value Exceeds error display 283 D dead band 97 setting 98 derivative time 68 detection current 75 dimensions 22 ESAN 22 ESCN 22 309 ESCN U 22 ESEN 22 ESGN 23 direct operation 55 206 Display Range Exceeded error display 281 down key 5 E error displays 281 Current Value Exceeds 283 Display Range Exceeded 281 Heater Burnout 283 Heater Overcurrent 283 HS Alarm 283 Input Error 281 Memory Error 282 event inputs 13 41 99 101 wiring 41 external dimensions Current Transformer CT 279 external power supply for ESIB 14 44 90 276 F front panel ESAN 2 ESCN 2 ESCN U 2 ESEN 3 ESGN 3 H HB alarm heater burnout alarm 73 settings 80 Heater Burnout error display 283 heater burnout alarm 13 276 heater burnout hysteresis 223 heater burnout latch 223 heater overcurrent hysteresis 247 latch 246
350. s terminals 7 and 9 On the E5AN EN 0O3 auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across terminals 9 and 10 auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 7 and 8 and auxiliary output 3 SUB3 is output across terminals 5 and 6 On the E5GN L12 auxiliary output 1 SUB1 is output across termi nals 5 and 6 and auxiliary output 2 SUB2 is output across terminals 13 and 14 on the bottom of the Controller Wire terminals 13 and 14 and tighten the screws When the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON when an input error occurs When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the E5CN HO E5CN OOHHO or E5GN OOHO alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function When the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the E5AN EN OOH alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function On the E5CN and ES5CN U when heating cooling control is used auxil iary output 2 becomes control output cooling On the E5AN and E5EN when heating cooling control is used auxiliary output 3 becomes control output cooling On the E5GN when heating cooling control is used auxiliary output 1 becomes control output cooling For models that have a heater burnout alarm an OR of the alarm 1 func tion and the HB alarm HS alarm or heater overcurrent alarm is sent to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function auxili
351. se Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it snaps into position Make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other and then press the body of the Temperature Controller toward the rear case until it snaps into position Bottom View of the ESAN Removing the Terminal The terminal block can be removed from the E5GN It is not possible for the Block E5CN E5AN E5EN and E5CN U E5GN The body of the Controller can be replaced by removing the terminal block from the E5GN 1 2 3 1 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the tool holes one on the top and one on the bottom to release the hooks Do not apply excessive force Terminal hole Flat blade screwdriver Unit mm 20 min Note The method for removing the terminal block is the same for both screw termi nal blocks and screwless clamp terminal blocks 30 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Do not connect a different type of terminal block to a Controller For example do not replace a screw terminal block with a screwless clamp terminal block The temperature indication accuracy will decrease 2 2 Wiring Terminals Confirm the location of the terminals terminals 1 to 15 for the E5CN 1 to 30 for the E5AN and E5EN and terminals 1 to 14 for the ES5GN using the prod uct labels and case markings 2 2 1 Terminal Arrangement
352. ses n a a e 21 2 1 Installationies c5 05 28 5 ikke alas ee a SA eS a Se a eS Teeny ae ose la os 22 2 2 Wiring Terminals asen eioi cece oleae bee EE Fine Cbd he eee 31 2 3 Using the Support Software Port 0 2 0 0 cece eee 45 SECTION 3 Basic Operations occisce cae eee tices eiveracsvevers 49 3 1 Initial Setting Examples 0 0 00 cece eee eae 50 3 2 Setting the Input Type 2 cence eee eae 52 3 3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 00 ee eee ee eee 54 3 4 Selecting PID Control or ON OFF Control 0 0 0 0 eee eee 54 3 5 Setting Output Specifications 2 2 cece eee 54 3 6 Setting the Set Point SP st ririo pane ran eee eee eb eee eee tn serene 59 3 7 Usins ON OFF Controles enaa thet e hee CEO eee ite E os 60 3 8 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup 0 0008 62 3 9 Alarm Outputs 505 2055 5 ee ba eS AG SENGN G8 een a a eae ke NES 69 3 10 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 73 3 11 Setting the No 3 Displays ecse se ko ee et E ERE a T E E oR hw ates Maes 84 SECTION 4 Applications Operations cceeececeeeeeees 87 4 1 Shifting Input Values eree E ccc nee eens 89 4 2 Alarm Hysteresis ccs ete ce oo bees Cee Sew ee bea bee Ieee ohne deere 93 4 3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 94 4 4 Executing Heating Cooling Control 0 0 0 eee cee ee 95 4 5
353. set for execution using an event input assignment 1 and 2 ON Writing enabled A OFF Writing disabled Default OFF Setting E Related Parameters See MB command logic switching advanced function setting level Page 229 Communications Unit No Communications baud rate Communications data length Communications parity Communications stop bits communications setting level Page 255 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The HB ON OFF parameter or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON m e This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Heater burnouts or heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out put heating ON time is 100 ms or less m Monitor range Unt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the heater cur rent 1 value monitor will flash k Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1 Heater burnout detection 2 adjustment level Pages 181 and 183 HB ON OFF advanced function setting level Page 222 Heater overcurrent detection 1 Heater overcurrent detection 2 adjustment l
354. set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit Manual Control Level Setting moniter value Display Default_ Unt Monitor Setting Item Level The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor Setting 1 to 5 advanced function setting level setting Advanced Function Setting Level Parameters Parameter Initializa tion Characters Setting monitor value OFF FACT Display GFF FACE Default Set value Multi SP Uses OFF ON OFF oN SP Ramp Time Unit S EU second M EU minute H EU hour Standby Sequence Reset Condition A condition B Condition A HB ON OFF OFF ON ON Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm N O Close in alarm N C Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm N O Close in alarm N C Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm N O Close in alarm N C Open in alarm Heater Burnout Latch OFF ON Heater Burnout Hys teresis 0 1 to 50 0 A ST Stable Range 0 1 to 999 9 C or F a 0 00 to 1 00 None AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 None AT Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 9 99 FS Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 5 0 to 50 0 Input Digital Filter 0 0 to 999 9 Second Additional PV Dis play OFF ON OFF aN None MV Display OFF ON
355. shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis fied at the installation environment Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product Note The tightening torque is 0 5 N m for the E5CN U and 0 43 to 0 58 N m for the E5GN The terminal torque is 0 5 to 0 6 N m for auxiliary output 2 on the E5GN xvii E Upgraded Functions The functionality of the E5CN ES5CN U E5AN and E5EN was improved starting from December 2007 production The functionality of the E5GN was improved starting from August 2009 production The design of the front panel can be used to differentiate between the previous and upgraded models E5CN CN U The upgraded Controllers are basically compatible with the previous Controllers Terminal arrangements terminal sizes and panel mounting depth have not been changed E5AN EN Although the upgraded Controllers are compatible with the previous Controllers terminal arrange ments have been changed Terminal sizes and panel mounting depth have not been changed E5GN Model numbers have changed accompanying the introduction of universal input capability The default setting of the input type parameter of the E5GN P models with resistance thermom eters has been changed from a Pt100 resistance thermom
356. sible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature e g a heater burnout fault Parameters Related to Loop Burnout Alarms Parameter name Symbol Setting range Remarks LBA Detection Time 0 to 9999 s Setting 0 disables the LBA function LBA Level Controllers with Thermo 0 1 to 999 9 C F See Default 8 0 C F couple Resistance Ther note mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0 01 to 99 99 FS Default 10 00 FS Inputs Controllers with Thermo 0 0 to 999 9 C F See Default 3 0 C F couple Resistance Ther note mometer Universal Inputs Controllers with Analog 0 00 to 99 99 FS Default 0 20 FS Inputs Note Set None as the unit for analog inputs A loop burnout alarm can be output by setting the alarm 1 type to 12 LBA A setting of 12 LBA can be set for alarm 2 or alarm 3 but the setting will be disabled e Loop burnouts are not detected during SP ramp operation e Loop burnouts are not detected during auto tuning manual operation or while stopped e If the alarm 1 latch is set to ON the latch will be effective for the loop burnout alarm Automatically Setting e The LBA detection time is automatically set by auto tuning the LBA Detection It is not set automatically however for heating cooling control Time e If the optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by
357. splay color is changed e When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected with the PV Change Color parameter the PV display color will change according to whether the present value PV is lower than within or higher than the PV stable band as shown in the following figure e There is a hysteresis of 0 2 C or F PV stable PV stable band band i lt q gt i gt Within l High A gt PV Ta A ae 0 2 C or F SP 0 2 C or F When analog inputs are used 0 02 FS Mois ting range Unt Deut Controllers with Thermocouple Resis 0 1 to 999 9 C or F tance Thermometer Universal Inputs See note Controllers with Analog Inputs 0 01 to 99 99 FS Note Set None as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs E Related Parameters PV change color advanced function setting level Page 230 231 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Alarm 1 must be assigned and the Alarm 1 ON Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 2 must be assigned and the Alarm 2 ON Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 3 must be assigned and the Alarm 3 ON Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0 12 or 13 Alarm 1 2 or 3 outputs are prevented from turning ON until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed Set the time for which the ON delay is to be enabled Function e To disable the ON
358. status display and SV status display PF Key added E5AN EN only omRon ESAN PV SP display selection for three level dis play ES5AN EN only XXV Previous models Upgraded models Inputs Square root extraction for models with ana log inputs Outputs Control output ON OFF count alarm MV change rate limiter Controls 40 AT Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment for heating cooling control PV rate of change alarm OC alarm only for models with heater burn out detection xxvi Logic operations Inverting direct reverse operation using event inputs or communications commands A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized Communications Characteristics Communications access size Double word access only Word access and double word access CompoWay F services Composite Read from Variable Area and Com posite Write to Variable Area Communications buffer 40 bytes size 217 bytes Baud rate 38 4 kbps max E5GN 19 2k max 57 6 kbps max Setup Tool Cable Communications 38 4k fixed External communica RS 485 RS 232C external communications tions and Setup Tool communications cannot be used at the same time E Other Upgrades Pr
359. sword set for the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter is entered for this parame ter Pametan e The Operation Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed if the cor rect password is entered E Related Parameters See Password to move to protect level protect level Page 162 oAPE Operation Adjustment Protect LLPE Initial Setting Communications Protect E Operation Adjustment Protect These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected Shaded settings are the defaults The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range Function of protection Set value M Sati Can be displayed Canbe displayed Canbe displayed Can be displayed etting PV SP Can be displayed and changed Can be displayed and changed Can be displayed and changed Can be displayed Others Can be displayed and changed Can be displayed and changed Cannot be dis played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis played and moving to other levels is not possible Adjustment Level Can be displayed and changed Cannot be dis played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis played and moving to other levels is not possible Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to 0 E Initial Setting Communications Protect This pr
360. t Note Normal Heater overcurrent status See note 3 A Ton l Toff i 4 Ji See note La a note a ON Control output heating OFF 1 Inthe above diagram power is considered to be ON normal if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval If the heater is burned out the measured current decreases and falls below the heater burnout detection value The output is then activat ed as the heater burnout alarm 2 In the above diagram power is considered to be OFF normal if the leak age current is less than the HS alarm current during the Toff interval If the SSR output is short circuited the measured current increases be yond the HS alarm value The output is then activated as the HS alarm 3 In the above diagram it is regarded as normal when the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current during the Ton period Current is increased when excessive current flows to the heater causing the heater overcurrent detection value to be exceeded and an OC heater overcurrent alarm to be output 4 Heater burnout and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out put heating ON time Ton is 100 ms or less 5 HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time Toff is 100 ms or less 73 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 e For
361. t For example if the upper limit value is set to 2 C and the lower limit value is set to 1 C the input temperature will be shifted by 1 5 C for a 50 input i e by the average of the upper limit and lower limit values e Set the upper limit value in the Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value parameter and the lower limit value in the Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value parameter Upper limit temperature Temperature input shift value A Upper limit F After shifting Before shifting 1 Lower limit f gt Input 0 a A Lower limit temperature 100 input shift value 4 1 2 How to Calculate Input Shift Values for a 2 point Shift Preparations 1 2 3 90 When an ES1B Infrared Temperature Sensor is connected to the E5CN an offset of several degrees to several tens of a degree can occur For this reason offset the readout value using a 1 point or 2 point shift as described in this section This offset occurs because a bias current for detect ing a Controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the infrared temperature sensor 1 Set a temperature range matching the input specifications of the infrared temperature sensor The ES1B can be used with the E5CIN only for a ther mocouple resistance thermometer universal input 2 Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the con trol target as shown in Figure 1 so that a 1 point shift or 2 point shift c
362. t parameter in the operation level and set the desired set value The new set point is selected two seconds after you have specified the new value e Multi SP is used to switch between two or four set points For details refer to 4 5 Using Event Inputs for details Operating Procedure In this example the set point is changed from 0 C to 200 C Operation Level 1 Normally the Process Value Set Point parameter is displayed The set point is 0 C 59 Using ON OFF Control Section 3 7 2 Use the IA and M Keys to set the set point to 200 C 3 7 Using ON OFF Control In ON OFF control the control output turns OFF when the temperature being controlled reaches the preset set point When the manipulated variable turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and the control turns ON again This oper ation is repeated over a certain temperature range At this time how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the Hys teresis Heating parameter Also what direction the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response to an increase or decrease in the process value is determined by the Direct Reverse Operation parameter 3 7 1 ON OFF Control Hysteresis Three position Control 60 e Switching between 2 PID control and ON OFF control is performed
363. t point Zo 0 FS g 10 Argument 1 input data A Soning rangs Um Default m o Setting 194 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 E Related Parameters See Extraction of square root enable initial setting level Page 216 195 Monitor Setting Item Level Section 5 5 5 5 Monitor Setting Item Level Monitor setting items can be displayed by means of the function key when the PF Setting parameter advanced function setting level is set to PFDP Moni tor Setting Item for the ES5AN EN only Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O Key for at least 1 s Monitor Setting Item Level Key Key C Control in progress The PF Setting parameter must be set to PFDP and the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters must not be Monitor Setting Item Display 1 to 5 set to OFF e When the PF Key is set to display monitor setting items pressing the PF Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters The contents of these parameters are shown in the following Function table For the setting monitor ranges refer to the applicable parameters Setting Remarks Monitor Setting Disabled PV SP Multi SP Can be set SP PV SP MV Can be set SP PV SP Soak time remain Can be set SP Proportional band P Can be set Integral time I Can be set Derivative time D Can be set Alarm value 1 Can be set Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set A
364. t the parameter to 7 GF Select the PV Stable Band parameter by pressing the kel Key Use the A Key to set the parameter to 15 0 To return to the initial setting level press the LO Key for at least one sec ond To return to the operation level press the LO Key for at least one second 115 Alarm Delays Section 4 11 4 11 Alarm Delays 4 11 1 Alarm Delays e Delays can be set for the alarm outputs ON and OFF delays can be set separately for alarms 1 2 and 3 The ON and OFF delays for alarm 1 function only for the alarm function If the alarm 1 function is set to be out put as an OR with other alarms i e the heater burnout alarm HS alarm heater overcurrent alarm or input error output alarm delays cannot be set for the other alarms The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1 2 and 3 also apply to the individual SUB1 SUB2 and SUB3 indicators and to communications status The alarm ON delays will also function when power is turned ON or when moving from the initial setting level to opera tion level e g to software resets All outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays will not function when moving to the initial setting level or when an alarm is output for a A D converter error Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays for an Upper limit Alarm PV Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting 1 ON delay 1 set time Alarm status i OFF delay set time
365. t to the END output When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF the Alarm 1 Output Assignment param eter will automatically be initialized to ALM1 When using heating cooling con trol and the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT the END output will not be assigned to an output Use the output assignment parameters to assign the program END output to the desired out put Clearing the Program End Status The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET The setting is changed from STRT to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed The program END status can also be cleared using an event If the program start function is assigned to an event however the program end status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display which will function only as a monitor display Perform the following procedure to use the simple program function In this example the program pattern will be set to STOP the soak time to 10 min and the wait band to 3 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 Set point Wait band 3 A 1 RSET gt STRT Soak time 10 min 4 END display gt STOP END output Operation Level Initial Setting Level 1 Press the O
366. tallation po sitions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current AC line Product To CT input Product To CT input 3 V connecting lines Refer to the following diagram for CT installation posi tions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so be take that into account when setting the detection current Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input 3 10 3 Calculating Detection Current Values e Calculate the set value using the following equation Normal current value Burnout current value 2 Heater Burnout Detection 1 2 set value HS Alarm 1 2 set value Leakage current value outa OFF HS current value Normal current value Overcurrent value 2 e To set the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters are con nected through the CT use the value from when the heater with the small est current burns out If all of the heaters have the same current use the value from when any one of them burns out Heater overcurrent 1 2 set value 75 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 e Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied Heater with a current of less than 10 0 A Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout gt 1A When the difference is less than 1 A detection is unstable Heater with a cur
367. tch the set point either by operating the keys or by using external input signals event inputs Funan This parameter is used to select set points 0 to 3 The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF SP M Set Point During SP Ramp The ST parameter must be set to OFF This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp operation A ramp is used to restrict the change width of the set point as a rate of change This parameter is displayed when a set value is input for the SP Ramp Set Value parameter adjustment level When not in ramp operation the set point will be the same as the one dis played for the Process Value Set Point parameter ____ Wonitorrange m SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit 4 Function Monitor E Related Parameters See Process value set point operation level Page 165 SP ramp set value adjustment level Page 193 Set point upper limit Set point lower limit initial setting level Page 203 167 Operation Level Section 5 3 Heater burnout HS alarm and heater overcurrent detection must be supported EEI Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for l detecting heater burnout This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Function Heater burnouts and heater ove
368. te 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 kbps 1 2 2 4 4 8 kbps 9 6 19 2 38 4 or 57 6 Communications data length 7 or 8 bits 7 or 8 bits Stop bits 1 or 2 bits 1 or 2 bits Communications parity NoaNE EVEN add None Even Odd Send data wait time E Related Parameter 0 to 99 0 to 99 ms Communications writing adjustment level Page 180 255 Communications Setting Level Section 5 9 256 SECTION 6 CALIBRATION This section describes how the user can calibrate the ESCN and ESCN U Digital Temperature Controllers 6 1 Parameter Structure lt es os ca oeae be E eee swe EEES 258 6 2 User Calibration escena oks aderen eee hee eine Wesabe RS 260 6 2 1 Calibrating Inputs 0 eee eee 260 6 2 2 Registering Calibration Data 0 0008 260 6 3 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 260 6 3 1 Preparations 3 065266 6 se eS oa eee lae See E Ee 261 6 4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 264 6 5 Analog Input Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input 265 6 6 Calibrating Analog Input Analog Input 0 0004 267 6 6 1 Calibrating a Current Input 0 0 00 00 267 6 6 2 Calibrating a Voltage Input 0 00 0004 268 6 7 Checking Indication Accura
369. ter by pressing the ce Key Use Check that this parameter is set to ON the default Next set the HS Alarm 1 parameter 81 Using Heater Burnout Heater Short and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3 10 HS Alarm Settings Operation Level 5 Press the lO Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level Press the LO key again for at least one second to move to the operation level Adjustment Level 6 Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the operation Adjustment Level level to the adjustment level Display Leakage Current 7 Select the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter by pressing the ce Key 1 Monitor Check the current value Next set the HS Alarm 1 parameter HS Alarm 1 8 Select the HS Alarm 1 parameter by pressing the cel Key Refer to Calcu lating Detection Current Values on page 75 when setting the values 9 For this example set 2 5 To return to the operation level press the O Key for less than one second
370. ter overcurrent detection must be LER Leakage Current 2 Monitor e a The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for l detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current value Function e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less E Monitor range Umt e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash Monitor E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays L L F7 Page 283 Operation Level Section 5 3 The Program Pattern parameter PRSE Program Start must not be set to OFF This parameter starts and stops the simple program function l e The RUN STOP status will automatically switch to RUN when this param z eter is set to STRT Function e The simple program will stop when this parameter is set to RSET e This parameter will function as a monitor display for the start stop status of the simple program if an event input is selected to start the simple pro gram Setting rangs Default RSET Stops the simpler program RSEE STRT Starts the simpler program Operation E Related Parameters See Soak time remain
371. ters advanced function setting level J Press the O Key for at lea stis Al Ee atm 2 Type Alarm 2 Hysteresis ALE 3 Alarm 3 Type 2 Hysteresis zp H Aims ag ER E mansier Output Type oF F Linear output H Transfer Output ER Upper Limit Transfer Output Lower Limit Linear Current Output Linear output Number of Multi SP Uses Two SPs 1 Four SPs 2 Event Input Assignment 1 Event Input Assignment 2 Extraction of Square Root Enable Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Displayed when initial setting commun protect is set to Move by setting password 169 Advanced Function Setting Level NM L Parameter Initialization MSP Multi SP Uses SP Ramp Time Unit Y B RESE Standby Sequence E Sh IN Auxiliary Output 1 y G Open in Alarm ve B 5 p pN Auxiliary Output 2 Es y g lOpen in Alarm N y a 5 b IN Auxiliary Output 3 S Openin Alarm zx N o Y c B Hh HB ON OFF B aN ve E Hiji Heater Burnout Latch ee GFF ta B Heater Burnout E HoH livsteresis eos Ye B Ci LST Stable Range BSE H ees 15
372. ters are displayed only when the conditions for use given on the right of the parameter heading are satisfied Protected parameters are not dis played regardless of the conditions for use but the settings of these parame ters are still valid Ci Pte Displayed symbol The E5CN must be in operation and aim AT Execute Cancel control must be 2 PID control Parameter name Conditions for use 5 1 3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5 1 4 Alarms 158 Parameters are described level by level The first page of each level describes the parameters in the level and the pro cedure to switch between parameters It will be specified in this section when alarms are set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters For example when alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assign ment parameter it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm For example if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned Protect Level Section 5 2 5 2 Protect Level Four levels of protection are provided on the E5UN operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect setting change protect and PF key protect E5AN EN only These protect levels prevent unwanted o
373. the Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters can be used 96 Executing Heating Cooling Control Dead Band Output Section 4 4 e For heating cooling control the dead band is set with the set point as its center The dead band width is the set value of the Dead Band parameter adjustment level Setting a negative value produces an overlapping band e If an overlapping band is set the bumpless function may not operate when switching between manual operation and automatic operation e The default is 0 0 EU for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Ther mometer Universal Inputs and 0 00 FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs Dead band Dead band width A positive value Overlapping dead band Dead Output band width A negative value Heating side A Set point Cooling Coefficient Output P for control output assigned to heating side 0 Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment Note P for control output A Set point P for control output assigned to heating side x 0 8 Cooling side Heating side Cooling side A Set point If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to the cooling side Use this to a
374. the ES1B K 0 to 260 C specification In equations 1 Temperature Input and 2 the set temperature lower limit YL is 0 C and the set temperature upper Shift limit YH is 260 C Check the temperature of the control target The temperature input offset values can be calculated as shown below when the Controller readout Y1 is 40 C for a room temperature X1 of 25 C and when the Controller readout Y2 is 105 C for a set point temperature X2 of 110 C Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value E M Lower limit L NGL Temperature INS 0740 Input Shift 105 40 Value x 110 105 25 40 25 40 27 3 C Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value E NEP Upper limit r NSH Temperature CNSH os x 110 105 25 40 25 40 52 7 C Ea n Input Shi 52 1 Vallie 4 2 Alarm Hysteresis e The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON OFF can be set as follows Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm hysteresis _ Alarm hysteresis i o i Uo OFF 1 OFF A Alarm value Alarm value e Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the Alarm Hyster esis 1 to Alarm Hysteresis 3 parameters initial setting level e The default is 0 2 C F for Controllers with Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 02 FS for Controllers with Ana
375. the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram Manual MV See note Output PID calculations Auto manual switch MV at Stop MV lower limit Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit 4 17 Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Extraction of Square Roots Extraction of Square Root Enable e For analog inputs the Extraction of Square Root parameter is provided for inputs so that differential pressure type flow meter signals can be directly input e The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF The Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON in order to use this function Extraction of Square Root Low cut If the PV input i e the input before extracting the square root is higher Point than 0 0 and lower than the low cut point set in the Extraction of Square Root Low Cut Point parameter the results of extracting the square root will be 0 0 If the PV input is lower than 0 0 or higher than 100 0 extraction of the square root will not be executed so the result will be equal to the PV input The low cut point is set as normal ized data for each input with 0 0 as the lower limit and 100 0 as the upper limit for the input setting range 137 Using the Extraction
376. the ST stable range During reverse operation the new set point is larger than the set point before the change and during direct opera tion the new set point is smaller than the set point before the change The temperature is stable See note 2 Equilibrium with the output amount at 0 when the power is turned ON is also all right See note 3 1 The previous SRT implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT 2 In this state the measurement point is within the ST stable range 3 In this state the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is within the ST stable range or less In the following instances PID constants are not changed by self tuning ST for the present set point 1 When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON 2 When auto tuning AT has been executed The ST stable range determines the condition under which ST self tuning functions 65 Determining PID Constants AT ST Manual Setup Section 3 8 This procedure sets the ST stable range to 20 0 C Advanced Function Setting Level 1 Select the ST Stable Range parameter by pressing the ce Key in the ad vanced function setting level 2 Use the IAI Key to set the parameter to 20 0 C 3 8 3 RT Robust Tuning e
377. the advanced function setting level either by pressing ce Key or PUNGHON O Key or by waiting or two seconds to elapse E Related Parameter See Initial setting communication protect protect level Page 160 217 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 5 8 Advanced Function Setting Level The advanced function setting level is used for optimizing Controller perfor mance To move to this level input the password 169 from the initial set ting level To be able to enter the password the Initial Setting Communications Protect parameter in the protect level must be set to 0 e The parameters in this level can be used when the Initial Setting Commu nications Protect parameter is set to 0 e To switch between setting levels press the O Key To change set values press the IA and Keys Operation Adjustment Press the O Key less than 1 s Press the Press the Ol Key fi Mey E p 5 Press the Key for at for at least 1 s least 3 s Control stops Initial Setti Communi nitla etting 4 D cations Level Setting Press the Level O Key for less than 1 s Press the LO Key Password input for at least 1 s set value 169 Control in progress a Control stopped Advanced Function Setting Level 218 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Adva
378. the input type parameter l RS 232C RS 485 Event inputs Control output 1 I SD O B ak i Relay output Ee Event Inputs l RD AC lt NJE l 250 VAC 5A 1 Olt SG OONOTUSE Itoo resistive load Input power supply EV2 Mes E A ete J Voltage output gt 2 1 2I for driving SSR gt ev 12 VDC 40 mA Bit T1 CT2 Output 2 Current output Control output 1 CTICT2 Control Output Eternal Power Supply fad 800 m GTI Control output2 Load max ntrol outpu 7 HO G y External power supply Auxiliary output 3 CT2 12 VDC 20 mA Control output 2 i L 6 a8 _ DO NOT Voltage output i g USE NOT for driving SSR a ae o 12 VDC 21 mA Auxiliary output 2 _ g i Long life relay output KE DONOT i DONOT 250 VAC 3A 7 USE USE fA resistive load j Ss ee 7 i Ie Qe Abies Auxiliary output 1 B 1 V ponot i L q 0 l i USE A heater burnout alarm heater short alarm a heater overcurrent alarm or input error is Auxiliary output 1 2 3 Relay outputs 250 VAC 3A resistive load function is assigned TC Pt universal input Analog input sent to the output to which the alarm 1 Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection
379. the operation level press the O Key for less than one second 83 3 11 Setting the No 3 Display This section describes how to set the No 3 Display ES5AN EN The Multi SP MV or soak time remain can be displayed on the No 3 display 3 11 1 PV SP Display Selection The following table shows the set values and display contents for the PV SP Display selection Set value Display contents Only PV SP is displayed with no No 3 display PV SP Multi SP and PV SP MV are displayed in order See note PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Multi SP is displayed Only PV SP MV is displayed See note PV SP Multi SP and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order See note Only PV SP Soak time remain is displayed A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory set value 0 A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized set value 4 Note For details on setting the MV for heating and cooling control refer to MV Dis play for Heating and Cooling Control below When 1 2 5 or 6 is selected press the Ice Key to display the next value set for the PV SP display display 2 Example When the PV SP Display Screen Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV SP Display 1 Press the PV SP Display 2
380. the time only between 1 and 2 3 and 4 and 5 and the end If the wait band is set to OFF the wait band will be treated as infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing from RSET to STRT 131 Using the Simple Program Function Section 4 15 4 15 2 Operation at the Program End Note Operating Procedure 132 Display at the Program End When the program ends the process value will be displayed on the No 1 dis play see note and the set point and end will be alternately displayed on the No 2 display at 0 5 s intervals One of the following displays PV SP PV only or PV MV Displayed alternately Mr lt lt CUL Program End Output The output assignment parameters can be used to assign the program END output to any output The program END output can also be used in communi cations status E5CN CN U E5AN EN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the E5CN E5CN U E5AN or E5EN the Auxiliary Output 1 Assign ment parameter will automatically be set to the END output When the Pro gram Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF the Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to ALM1 E5GN When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT for the E5GN the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter will auto matically be se
381. ti SP input e The following parameters are displayed for Controllers with CT Inputs Heater current monitors Leakage current monitors heater burnout detec tions HS alarms and heater overcurrent detections e Adjustment level parameters can be changed after setting the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter to 0 Displays and changing levels are not possible if the Operation Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 1 to 3 Protection is set in the protect level 177 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Adjustment Level Adjustment Level Display 20 0000 G Dead Band 00 0000 OO o SP i Manual Reset Value LIAT Execute Cancel 4 OF rile Ale role ale gt 20 0000 20 0000 oo Communications Writing SP2 Hysteresis Heating 00 OOO 00 OOO 00 OF a Heater Current 1 SBS Value Monitor Hysteresis Cooling kus Le a Ln l 00 O00 al 8 G Heater Burnout Detection 1 Temperature Input Soak Time Shift 3 Bu 20 0000 o0 o is Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value Proportional Band MV at PV Error Wait Band mje odje oc Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 1 o 22 Or a o0 mon G je Sy Bl aed E
382. tial setting level Page 200 Number of multi SP uses Page 213 Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 Multi SP uses Page 220 advanced function setting level The Input Type parameter must be 2 set for a thermocouple or resistance LNS Temperature Input Shift thermometer and the Input Shift Type parameter must be set to a one point shift Sometimes an error occurs between the set point and the actual temperature To offset this a compensated value can be obtained by adding an input shift value to the input The compensated value is displayed as the measurement value and used for control The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate 1 point shift If the input shift l value is set to 1 C control will be performed for a value 1 C lower than the measured temperature Function A Sening range Unt Default 9109909 Cor 00 Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 Input shift type advanced function setting level Page 233 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 LNSH Upper limit Temperature Input Shift Value The Input Type parameter must be set for a thermocouple or resistance thermometer and the Input Shift Type CNSL Lower limit Temperature Input Shift Value Parameter must be set to a 2 point shift or the Input Type parameter must be set for an infrared sensor These parameters are used to shift the input temperature at two poi
383. tion Editor Setting Range Edit Form Ea Ge Ce Se 2 Channel 1 Channel name CH1 Channel 1 ameter Name Logic Operation Editor Setting Range 5 3 ESAN RY3BT N 5 3 Control in Progress Parameters _ Protect Level a0 Operation Level Adjustment Level 4 Manual Control Level Edit Form Making the Settings The following display will appear on the Logic Operation Editor Setting Win dow Set each of the parameters Zax Import of Library Close Operation of Work Bit 1 Operation of Work Bit 2 Operation of Work Bit 3 Operation of Work Bit 4 Operation of Work Bit 5 Operation of Work Bis gt Operation Type Operation 1 fd Work Bit 1 is used by Alam figRunestor z 1H Work Bit 1 Input A Input B Input C Input D 1 Os Os O Always OFF x O Always OFF p Time Unit C min Cs Number of Multi SP Uses 1 25P i Event Input Data Event Input Assignment Event Input iE vent input 1 extemal ing gt None Event Input 2 Event input 2 extemal ing gt RUN STOP Auxiliary Output 1 work bit 1 Event Input 2 Event input 3 external ing gt None Auxiliary Output 2 pam S Event Input 4 Event input 4 extemal ing 7 None Auriliary Output3 Alarm 3 i This parameter sets the function to be assigned to alarm output 1 a Program end output can be selected only when the program pattem is not set to OFF x 1 2 3
384. tions Section 1 3 Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Communications Setting Level Calibration Level To move to the initial setting level from the operation level or the adjust ment level press the O Key for at least 3 seconds The PV display flashes after one second This level is for specifying the input type and selecting the control method control period setting direct reverse opera tion setting the alarm types etc You can move to the advanced function setting level or communications setting level from this level To return to the operation level press the LO Key for at least one second To move to the communications setting level press the LO Key for less than one sec ond When moving from the initial setting level to the operation level all the indicators will light Note Pressing the lO Key for at least 3 seconds in the operation level s auto manual switching display will move to the manual control level and not the initial setting level To move to the advanced function setting level set the Initial Setting Com munications Protect parameter in the protect level to 0 and then in the ini tial setting level input the password 169 From the advanced function setting level it is possible to move to the cali bration level or to the initial setting level This level is for setting the automatic display return time and standby sequence
385. tput a work bil output e When this parameter is set to ON the output assigned for alarm 1 turns ON for input errors 4 Note For details on input errors refer to Error Displays on page 281 e The alarm 1 output is an OR output of alarm 1 HB alarm HS alarm heater overcurrent alarm and input error a e Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level communi cations setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level Function Setting Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Setting range Default aN Enabled af F Disabled ror Input type must be thermocouple or Cul Cold Junction Compensation Method infrated te inpetailte selise e This parameter specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be per formed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting is 5 to 22 24 or 25 panpin e The cold junction compensation external setting is enabled when the tem perature difference is measured using two thermocouples or two ES1B Sensors C Setingrange Detam A EN Internally SFF Externally w Setting E Related Parameters See Input type initial setting level Page 200 i Communications must be supported RL RY MB Command Logic Switching CompoWay F must be selected as the protocol e This parameter switches the logic of the MB command communications writing switch fo
386. trol Period Set the output periods control periods Though a shorter period provides Heating better control performance it is recommended that the control period be set to 20 seconds or longer for a relay output to preserve the service life olny of the relay After the settings have been made in the initial setup readjust the control period as required by means such as trial operation e Set the control periods in the Control Period Heating and Control Period Cooling parameters in the initial setting level The default is 20 seconds e The control periods are used only for PID control e The Control Period Cooling parameter is used only for heating cooling control 54 Setting Output Specifications Section 3 5 e When control output 1 is used as a current output Control Period Heat ing cannot be used 3 5 2 Direct and Reverse Operation e Direct operation increases the manipulated variable whenever the pro cess value increases Reverse operation decreases the manipulated vari able whenever the process value increases Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100 100 0 0 lt Ee Low Set Value High Low Set Value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example when the process value PV is lower than the set point SP in a heating control system the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP Accordingly reve
387. troller s terminal block wiring away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Temperature Controller wiring Using shielded cables and using separate con duits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance compo nent When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Temperature Controller Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Temperature Controller and devices that gener ate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge Ensuring Measurement Accuracy When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same Mount the Temperature Controller so that it is horizontally level If the measurement accuracy is low check to see if input shift has been set correctly Waterproofing Xiv The degree of protection is as shown below Sections without any specification on their degree of p
388. tructure Model Number Legends Note 1 2 2 Main Functions This section introduces the main E5CN CN U AN EN GN functions For details on particular functions and how to use them refer to SECTION 3 Basic Operation and following sections Input Sensor Types 12 Controllers E5GN L L 12345 6 7 8 Control Output 1 R Relay output Q Voltage output for driving SSR C Current output Auxiliary Outputs Blank None 1 One outputs 2 Two outputs Option Blank None 01 RS 232C communications 03 RS 485 communications B Two event inputs H Heater burnout Heater short Heater overcurrent detection CT1 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer input L Analog current voltage input Power Supply Voltage Blank 100 to 240 VAC D 24 VAC VDC Terminal Type Blank Models with Screw Terminal Blocks C Models with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Case Color Blank Black W Silver Communications Protocol Blank None FLK CompoWay F communications Silver is available by special order only e The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input i e E5_N 00007 Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII Infrared temperature sensor ES1B 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140 to 260 C Platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 JPt100 Analog in
389. ts of parameters and settings N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given XXXV XXXVI SECTION 1 Introduction This section introduces the features components and main specifications of the ESCN and ESAN and ESEN Digital Temperature Controllers EI Names of Parts eena 2c coiigd adobe hed ein hee bed bed ees 2 l 1 Fro t Pan l s os onn pi eds a ee wise 5 Soe A see dg ES 2 1 1 2 Explanation of Indicators 0 0 cece eee ee eee 4 1 1 3 Using the Keys arrira aeta eee eee aen EARE FSR Oa 5 1 2 TO Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 0 000005 6 1 2 1 W O Configuration 0 0 00 eee eee eee 6 1 2 2 Main Functions 0 00 0 ce eee 12 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations 15 1 3 1 Selecting Parameters 0 00 17 1 3 2 Saving Settings cope 0 02 eee eee eee 18 1 4 Communications Function 0 0 0 2 eee ee 18 1 5 Insulation Block Diagrams 0 0 eee eee 20 Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E5CN CN U E5AN Names of Parts Front Panel The front panel is the same for the E5CN and E5CN U Te
390. ttern This parameter sets the type of control when using the simple program func tion e If the program pattern is set to oF F the simple program will not operate l e If the program pattern is set to Sta the RUN STOP status will change to STOP after the soak time has expired If the program pattern is set to epee vo L rumen ant control will continue in RUN status after the soak time has expired Seiting range Default a z Simple program function turned OFF Go to STOP mode at end of program Setting Continue in RUN mode at end of program E Related Parameters See Program start Soak time remain Page 171 RUN STOP Page 172 operation level Soak time Wait band adjustment level Page 191 Soak time unit advanced function setting level Page 243 205 Initial Setting Level Section 5 7 4 The cooling control output and heat ing control output must be assigned Control Period Heating to relay or voltage outputs for driving SSR The control must be set to 2 PID control Control Period Cooling For the Control Period Cooling parameter the control must be set to heating cooling control e These parameters set the output periods Set the control periods taking the control characteristics and the electrical durability of the relay into consideration Puneti e For standard control use the Control Period Heating parameter The Control Period C
391. tting Level Initial Setting Level Function A Setting 200 Input Type Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit Decimal Point n Temperature Unit SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit PID ON OFF Standard or Heating Cooling ST Program Pattern Input Type Section 5 7 Transfer Output Lower Control Period Heating Limit 20 0000 20 Control Period Cooling Aineet Curren Cuqpui 00 0000 OO Number of Multi SP aje Direct Reverse Operation Uses mon o0 EF Ba mom ar Event Input Assignment m jejo Bl Alarm 1 Type 1 tis g w 7 00 0000 00 OOO 00 OF g is Event Input Assignment Alarm 1 Hysteresis 2 H b 200 OU AES Extraction of Square Root Enable Pe x n nl Alarm 2 Type 20 0000 A o 00 O00 Move to Advanced Phe Bl T oO Alarm 2 Hysteresis Function Setting Level mon or os AG Pu o0 fale Alarm 3 Type 20 0000 is Alarm 3 Hysteresis ne j Pag Fo 20 0000 oo ae 8l Transfer Output Type 00 0000
392. tting Level Move to Ad vanced Function Parameter Initialization Advanced Function Setting Level Alarm 1 ON Delay Advanced Function Setting Level Alarm 1 OFF Delay nitial Setting Level Input Type Section 4 11 1 The defaults are 0 i e the ON and OFF delays are disabled 2 The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and when the alarm type is set to any type but 0 none 12 LBA or 13 PV change rate alarm Use the following procedure to set ON and OFF delays for the alarm 1 An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 s will be set 1 Press the LO Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press ing the cel Key For details on moving between levels refer to 4 8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Press the Key to enter the password 169 and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level Press the ce Key to select the Alarm 1 ON Delay parameter Press the lA Key to set the parameter to 5 Press the kel Key to select the Alarm 1 OFF Delay parameter Press the IA Key to set the parameter to 10 Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level
393. ttings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 7 Press the ce Key The display changes as shown on the left Set the STV to 700 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered 262 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer Input Section 6 3 13 Press the cel Key The display changes as shown on the left Set the STV to 400 mV Allow the count value on the No 2 display to fully stabilize then press the X Key to temporarily register the calibration settings If this count value is outside of the specified range the No 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered When the kel Key is pressed the status changes as shown to the left Change the wiring as follows Open in non connected state Short circuit
394. ttings are shown below The alarm is output when the set point exceeds 10 C In this example the temperature unit is C Alarm 1 type 2 Upper limit alarm Alarm value 1 10 1 Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level 71 Alarm Outputs Alarm 1 Type Alarm Value 1 PV Change Rate Alarm 72 Section 3 9 2 Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the Ice Key Confirm that the set value is 2 The default value is 2 Upper limit alarm 3 To return to the operation level press the C Key for at least one second gt A Select the Alarm Value 1 parameter by pressing the kel Key 5 Use the IA Key to set the parameter to 10 The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period Differ ences with previous values in each set period are calculated and an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm value The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms If a positive value is set for the alarm value the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the rising direction If a negative value is set the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falli
395. ture Input Shift Value 199 9 to 999 9 C or F Lower Limit Temper ature Input Shift Value 199 9 to 999 9 C or F Proportional Band Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note Analog input 0 1 to 999 9 FS Integral Time 0 to 3 999 Second Derivative Time RT OFF 0 to 3 999 Second RT ON 0 0 to 999 9 Second Cooling Coefficient 0 01 to 99 99 None Dead Band Universal input 199 9 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 19 99 to 99 99 FS 289 Appendix Parameters Characters Setting monitor value Display Default Set value Manual Reset Value af F 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Hysteresis Heating H45 Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 1 0 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 0 10 FS Hysteresis Cooling H45 Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 1 0 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 0 10 FS Soak Time SoAK 1 to 9 999 1 min or h Wait Band WE h Universal input OFF 0 1 to oFF 0 ito OFF C or F 999 9 999 9 See note 1 Analog input OFF 0 01 to oFF i ito OFF FS 99 99 99 99 MV at Stop MY 5 5 0 to 105 0 standard 0 0 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing MV at PV Error MY E 5 0 to 105 0 standard 0 0 105 0 to 105 0 heating cool ing SP Ramp Set Value SPRE OFF or 1 to 9 999 aFF ito OFF EU s EU 9999
396. tween using e Whether the Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters are displayed or hidden is determined by the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter set ting Models with Two Event Inputs 1 and 2 Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Displayed Multi SP not used Number of multi 0 SP uses Description of EV1 and EV2 operation EV1 and EV2 will perform the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assign ment 1 and 2 parameters Not displayed Operation per formed with two Multi SP points Displayed Event input 2 not used as multi SP switch EV1 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 and 1 EV2 will per form the operation command assigned using the Event Input Assignment 2 parameter Not displayed Operation performed with four Multi SP points EV1 and EV2 will be used for the Multi SP function to switch between set points 0 1 2 and 3 The following tables show the relationships between ON OFF combinations of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points Number of Multi SP Uses 1 Even input 1 OFF Selected set point Set point 0 ON Set point 1 Number of Multi SP Uses 2 Even input 1 Even input 2 Selected set point Set point 0 Set point 1 Set point 2 Set point 3 213 Initial Setting Level Number of multi SP uses Number of Multi SP Uses 214 Models with Tw
397. unction 227 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 e The output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level com munications setting level advanced function setting level or calibration level e If an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm the output is kept closed If it is set to open in alarm it is kept open Setting range A oN Enabled of F Disabled oFF Setting E Related Parameters See Alarm value 1 to 3 Page 172 to 173 Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 Page 174 to 175 Alarm value lower limit 1 to 3 Page 174 to 175 operation level Alarm 1 to 3 type initial setting level Page 207 to 210 Standby sequence reset Page 221 Auxiliary output 1 to 3 open in alarm Page 222 advanced function setting level Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis Page 209 initial setting level Event input assignment 1 and 2 initial setting level Page 216 HB ON OFF Page 222 PF setting Page 247 advanced function setting level PRLE Move to Protect Level Time e This parameter sets the key pressing time required to move to the protect level from the operation level the adjustment level or monitor setting item level Function Soning range Unt Default A Setting E Related Parameters See Operation adjustment protect Initial setting communications protect Setting change protect protect level Page 160 Alarm 1 must be assigned but not to SERa Input Error Ou
398. unt Alarm Set Value Ig Zo o Po py onan Ey Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Alarm Set Value gpm B e ae Coefficient Adjustment i ON OFF Counter Reset Move to Calibration Level Extended Function 307 Appendix 308 Numerics 2 PID control 54 204 A adjustment level 16 177 parameter operation list 289 advanced function setting level 17 218 moving to 108 parameter operation list 294 alarm delays 116 alarms 13 alarm delays 116 alarm hysteresis 93 alarm latch 94 alarm outputs 69 alarm types 70 alarm values 71 operation 94 analog input 94 272 calibration 265 267 AT auto tuning 62 auto control 103 auto manual select addition 124 234 auto manual switch 166 auxiliary output 1 assignment 240 auxiliary output 2 assignment 241 auxiliary output 3 assignment 242 auxiliary outputs 1 2 and 3 40 wiring 41 B basic model ESAN 9 ESCN 6 ESCN U 7 ESEN 9 ESGN 11 C calibration analog input 265 267 current input 267 indication accuracy 270 input types 260 Index platinum resistance thermometer 264 registering calibration data 260 thermocouple 260 user calibration 260 voltage input 268 characteristics 277 cold junction compensator connecting 261 communications operation commands 112 wiring RS 232C 44 RS 485 42 communications function 14 communication
399. uration and Main Functions Section 1 2 T A e R a7 a gt Control output 1 owe gt gt Control output 2 E5AN EN Temperature input Control Control output or analog input section heating Control output cooling See note External power supply for ES1B fy See note Same ae Alarm output 3 CT1 input Alarm output 2 Senpi E HS alarm gt gt Alarm output 1 Event inputs 1 and _HSaem 2 2 channels E Heating cooling Input error Program end output Communications function Note Functions can be assigned individually to each output by changing the set val ues for the Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxil iary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment and Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level Note Press one of these keys depending on the model I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 Model Number Structure Model Number Legends Conirollers Option Units E5AN EN U3UMULI LI 500 N E53 123456 7 8 9 1 1 Control Output 1 1 Function R Relay output ENO1 RS 232C Q Voltage output for driving SSR communications C Current output ENO3 RS 485 communications 2 Auxiliary Outputs AKB Event input 3 Three outputs 3 Heater Burnout Heater Short Control Output 2 or External Pow
400. urrent alarm is turned turn ON A Soning range Unit Default Function Setting E Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor adjustment level Page 180 Heater overcurrent use Heater overcurrent latch Heater overcurrent hystere sis advanced function setting level Page 222 183 Adjustment Level Section 5 4 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON ma Ri Leakage Current 1 Monitor m This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short circuits This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is OFF e HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Monitor range Unit e FFFF is displayed when 55 0 A is exceeded e If an HS alarm 1 alarm is output the HA indicator will light and the No 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash i Function Monitor E Related Parameters See HS alarm 1 HS alarm 2 adjustment level Page 184 HS alarm use advanced function setting level Page 235 Error Displays LL F i Page 283 Heater burnout HS alarms and heater overcurrent detection must be HS HS Alarm 1 supported Alarm 1 must be assigned The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON a This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be
401. using the PID ON OFF parameter in the initial setting level When this parame ter is set to Pod 2 PID control is selected and when it is set to aNaF ON OFF control is selected The default is aNaF e With ON OFF control hysteresis is used to stabilize operation when switching between ON and OFF The control output heating and control output cooling functions are set in the Hysteresis Heating and Hystere sis Cooling parameters respectively e In standard control heating or cooling control the setting of the Hystere sis Heating parameter in the adjustment level is used as the hysteresis regardless of whether the control type is heating control or cooling con trol Reverse operation Hysteresis heating p ON FF U PV O A Set point e In heating cooling control a dead band an area where both control out puts are 0 can be set to either the heating or cooling side This makes it possible to use 3 position control Reverse operation D p ead band Hysteresis heatin Hysteresis coolin y heating gt l R Pia cooling ON Heating Cooling side side OFF PV A Set point Using ON OFF Control Section 3 7 Parameters Parameter level Application Standard or Heating Cooling Initial setting level Specifying control method PID ON OFF Initial setting level Specifying control method Direct Reverse Operation Initial setting level Specifying control method Dead Band Adjustment level Heating
402. ut 2 Number of Alarms Blank No alarm 1 One alarm 2 Two alarms 3 Input Type T Universal thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer L Analog Input 4 Plug in type U Plug in type Section 1 2 Option Units E53 CN 1234 1 Applicable Controller CN E5CN or E5CN H 2 Function 1 Blank None Q Control output 2 voltage for driv ing SSR P Power supply for sensor 3 Function 2 Blank None H Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT1 HH Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT2 B Two event inputs 03 RS 485 communications H03 Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT1 RS 485 communica tions HB Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT1 Two event inputs HHO3 Heater burnout SSR failure Heater overcurrent detection CT2 RS 485 communications 4 Version N2 Applicable only to models released after January 2008 Not all combinations of function 1 and function 2 specifications are possible for Option Units E53 1 Always connect an AC load to a long life relay output The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected because a triac is used for switching the circuit For details check the conditions in Ratings 2 Auxiliary outputs are contact outputs that can be used to output alarms or results of logic operations I O Config
403. ut 0 01 to 99 99 FS Alarm 3 Type Same settings as the alarm 2 type None Alarm 3 Hysteresis Universal input 0 1 to 999 9 C or F See note 1 Analog input 0 01 to 99 99 FS Transfer Output Type OFF OFF SP Set point SP M Ramp set point PV Process value MV Manipulated variable heating C MV Manipulated variable cooling None Transfer Output Upper Limit See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Transfer Output Lower Limit 292 See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 Parameters Linear Current Out put Characters Setting monitor value 4 20 4 to 20 mA 0 20 0 to 20 mA Display 4 20 0 20 Default Appendix Set value Multi SP Use Oto2 Event Input Assign ment 1 cel None None STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual PRST Program Start See note 3 DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute Can AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change WEP Enable Disable LAT Alarm Latch Cancel LAE Event Input Assign ment 2 cel None None STOP RUN STOP MANU Auto Manual PRST Program Start See note 3 DRS Invert Direct Reverse Operation AT 2 100 AT Execute Can AT 1 40 AT Execute Cancel WTPT Setting Change Enable Disable LAT Alarm Latch Cancel MZN NaNE Star MNT PIPING PRSE Extraction of Square Root Enable OFF ON
404. ut Settings Section 4 5 e Event inputs can be used for Multi SP RUN STOP Auto Manual Switch Program Start Invert Direct Reverse Operation 100 AT Execute Can cel 40 AT Execute Cancel Setting Change Enable Disable and Alarm Latch Cancel e Of these only the number of event inputs 0 to 2 set in the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter initial setting level are used for the multi SP function e Of these only the number of event inputs 0 to 2 set in the Number of Multi SP Uses parameter initial setting level are automatically assigned by the multi SP function Displays for event input assignments will not be displayed for inputs that are automatically assigned by the multi SP func tion Event inputs 1 and 2 are used for the multi SP function by models with four event inputs e Event inputs can be used on the following models E5CN LIMLI 500 with the E53 CNOBON2 for the ESCN E5AN EN LIML 500 N with the E53 AKB for the ESAN EN e When using event inputs to switch the multi SP the event input assign ment display will not appear Whether the set value and event input assignments 1 and 2 will be displayed or hidden is shown in the tables below e Do not connect the contacts from the same switch to more than one E5CIN Controllers Models with Two Event Inputs 1 and 2 Event input assignment 1 Event input assignment 2 Number of Multi Displayed Multi SP not used SP Uses Descriptio
405. uxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment E5AN E5EN only E aB Io id 9 zx c Ww z O in FE a R lt lt Character Select Soak Time Unit Alarm SP Selection z X fad goood og a inal mal o Manual MV Limit Enable R poaa jaf Di a PV Rate of Change Calculation Period goon i m wie i Automatic Cooling TEESIEN n gom B or P3 we o Heater Overcurrent Use paa oO Id Heater Overcurrent Latch a al po Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Ae x8 z Monitor Setting Item Display 5 po PF Setting E5AN E5EN only gom Monitor Setting Item 1 E5AN E5EN only Monitor Setting Item 2 Monitor Setting Item 3 Monitor Setting Item 4 Monitor Setting Item 5 PV SP Display Screen Selection MV Display Selection PV Decimal Point Display PV Status Display Function SV Status Display Function Display Refresh Period Ali Ma ppo Control Output 1 ON OFF Count Monitor Bl fg goood HS Control Output 2 ON OFF Count Monitor Ble a ole Ie ca eo Control Output 4 ON OFF Co
406. ver Ev2 9 DO NOT 4 USE cTiE 15 Control output 2 E53 CNHO3N2 E53 CNO3N2 E53 CNBN2 E53 CNQHN2 E53 CNQHHN2 E53 CNQBN2 Communications Communications Event inputs Control Output 2 Control Output 2 Event Inputs and RS 485 and CT RS 485 and CT and CT2 Control Output 2 RS 485 Control output 2 Control output 2 DO NOT Evi USE DO NOT USE Ev2 cT2 ome eas oC cCTiE Control output 2 Q5 Since the voltage output control output is not electrically insulated from the internal wiring one or other of the control output terminals must be left unearthed when using an earthed thermocouple thermometer Con nection makes measurements unreliable due to sneak currents To comply with EMC standards the length of the cable connecting the analog input or universal TC Pt input sensor must be 30 m or less If the cable is longer than 30 m the EMC standards will not be satisfied 31 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 E5CN U The E5 IN LIDLITH is set for a K thermocouple input type of 5 by default If a difference sensor is used an input error 5 ERF will occur Check the setting of the input type parameter Auxiliary output 250 VAC 3 A resistive load 14 i Relay outputs Control output 1 C4 Relay output Control output 1 Auxiliary output 1 three terminals used Oma Auxiliary output 2 SPDT 250 VAC 3A u Cont
407. volving holding these keys down simultaneously refer to 1 3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations For details on the protect level refer to SECTION 5 Parameters Ol A Keys To restrict set value changes in order to prevent accidental or incorrect oper Ol Keys ations these key operations require simultaneously pressing the O key along with A or gt key This applies only to the parameter for the password to move to protect level Refer to page 162 I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 1 2 1 O Configuration and Main Functions 1 2 1 I O Configuration E5CN Temperature input or analog input Control Control output section heating Control output cooling Ear Es Program end output Communications function Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment the Control Output 2 Assignment the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level I I lit en Se gt A Control output 2 See note Heating cooling i l l External power j See note i Fe for ES1B l l l I foe eee p p Auxiliary output 2 l see aie re Auxiliary output 1 CT1 input CT2 input Event inputs 2 channels Ul Note Press one of these keys l l l l l l l l l
408. wer lines in sep arate conduits or wiring using a more direct path Connection between the Temperature Controller and ther mocouple is using copper wires Connect the thermocouple s lead wires directly or connect a compensating conduc tor suitable for the thermocouple Installation location of thermometer is unsuitable Check whether the location of the thermom eter is suitable Input shift is not set correctly default 0 C Set a suitable input shift If input shift is not required set the input shift value to 0 0 Keys will not operate Setting change pro tect is ON Turn OFF setting change protect Cannot shift levels Operations limited due to protection Set the operation adjustment protect initial setting communications protect and set ting change protect values as required After long ser vice life Control is unstable Terminal screws may be loose Retighten terminal screws to a torque of 0 74 to 0 90 N m see note The internal compo nents have reached the end of their ser vice life The Temperature Controller s internal elec trolytic capacitor depends on the ambient temperature and load rate The structural life depends on the ambient environment shock vibration The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switch ing capacity and other switching conditions Always use the output relays within their rated load a
409. y The process value is displayed on the No 1 display and the set point is dis l played on the No 2 display Function L Process value Temperature According to indication range for Monitor each sensor Analog Scaling lower limit 5 FS to Scaling upper limit 5 FS Refer to page 303 Setting range Unit Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU During temperature input the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting 165 Operation Level Section 5 3 No 3 Display E5AN EN The following table shows the contents of the No 3 display according to the setting of the PV SP Display Screen Selection parameter Set value Display contents Only the PV and SP are displayed The No 3 display is not shown PV SP Multi SP and PV SP MV are displayed in order PV SP MV and PV SP Multi SP are displayed in order Only PV SP Multi SP are displayed PV SP MV are displayed PV SP Multi SP and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order PV SP MV and PV SP Soak time remain are displayed in order Only PV SP Soak time remain are displayed A 2 level display is set when shipped from the factory A 3 level display is activated if parameters are initialized When 1 2 5 or 6 is selected press the kel Key to display PV SP Display 2 Example When the PV SP Display Screen Select
410. y output 2 Function NaNE No function is assigned to auxiliary output 2 LME a Heating control output is output See note L a Cooling control output is output See note 1 ALM i Alarm 1 is output ALM Alarm 2 is output ALMI Alarm 3 is output F ENd Program end is output See note 2 RALM Control output ON OFF count alarm wR i Work bit 1 See note 4 Re Work bit 2 See note 4 WRI Work bit 3 See note 4 RY Work bit 4 See note 4 WS Work bit 5 See note 4 WRG Work bit 6 See note 4 NRT Work bit 7 See note 4 WA Work bit 8 See note 4 Note 1 If a is assigned for standard control a value equivalent to 0 will be output 2 Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF but the function will be disabled 3 If the Standard or Heating Cooling parameter is set to heating cooling control when there is no control output 2 E5CN CN U control automat ically switches to L a 4 WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used E Related Parameters See Standard or heating cooling Page 204 Program pattern Page 205 initial setting level 241 Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5 8 Subd gt Function O Setting See 242 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Note Auxiliary output 3 must be assigned E5AN and E5EN only e This parameter sets the function to be assigned to Auxiliary output 3 Setting range
411. ystem is operat ing Peripheral devices have heat preven tion device operat ing Set the heating prevention temperature set ting to a value higher than the set tempera ture of the Temperature Controller Note Refer to the ESCN ESAN ES5EN ESGN Digital Temperature Controller Communications Manual Cat No H158 for details 284 Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Appendix During opera tion continued Output will not turn ON Set to STOP default RUN Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the display control is stopped Specified operation is unsuitable for required control default Reverse operation Select either forward or reverse operation depending on the required control Reverse operation is used for heating operations A high hysteresis is set for ON OFF oper ation default 1 0 C Set a suitable value for the hysteresis Temperature Con troller will not oper ate Set to STOP default RUN Set the RUN STOP mode to RUN If STOP is lit on the display control is stopped Temperature error is large Input error S err dis play Thermometer has burnt out or short cir cuited Check whether the thermometer has burnt out or short circuited Thermometer lead wires and power lines are in the same conduit causing noise from the power lines generally dis play values will be unstable Wire the lead wires and po

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"